Help Guide

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
File Format (movie)
You can select the movie file format.
Recordable movie times
Refer to this topic for the shooting duration of movies recordable on the memory card.
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Switches the file format (JPEG/HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
FTP Help Guide
Refer to the “FTP Help Guide” when you want to transfer images to an FTP server.
ILCE-7SM3 support information
This website provides basic information about the camera and information regarding compatible
lenses and accessories. (Another window will open.)
How to use the “Help Guide”
Before Use
Checking the camera and the supplied items
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on using your camera
Precautions
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery
Notes on memory card
Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)
1
On cleaning
Names of parts
Names of parts
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Sides
Bottom
Basic operations
Touch operations on the monitor
Using the control wheel
Using the multi-selector
Using the mode dial
Using the MENU button
Using the C (custom) buttons
Using the Fn (Function) button
Using the DISP (Display Setting) button
Using the Delete button
Using the AEL button
Using the AF-ON button
Using the front dial and rear dial
Using the keyboard
Basic icons
In-Camera Guide
Preparing the camera/Basic shooting operations
Charging the battery pack
Charging the battery pack using a charger
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera
Using the battery charger abroad
2
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Inserting/removing a memory card
Attaching/removing a lens
Setting language, date and time
Basic shooting operations
Confirmation before shooting
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Shooting movies
Finding functions from MENU
Using the shooting functions
Contents of this chapter
Selecting a shooting mode
Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Bulb shooting
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
Movie: Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Auto Slow Shutter
Focusing
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Face/Eye AF
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)

3
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)
Face Memory
Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)
Using the AF functions
Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)
Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)
AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)
Focus Area Color (still image/movie)
AF Area Auto Clear
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Tracking Sensitivity
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF/MF Selector
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
AF in Focus Mag.
AF Illuminator
Aperture Drive in AF
4
Using the MF functions
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Histogram display
Reset EV Comp. (still image/movie)
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
Dial Ev Comp
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Zebra Display
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO (still image/movie)
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
ISO AUTO Min. SS
White balance
White Balance (still image/movie)
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
5
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
Adding effects to images
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Interval Shoot Func.
Setting the image quality and recording format
File Format (still image)
RAW File Type
JPEG/HEIF Switch
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
S&Q Settings
6
Proxy Settings
APS-C S35 (Super35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Angle of view
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Pad Settings
Touch Func. in Shooting: Touch Focus
Touch Func. in Shooting:Touch Tracking
Shutter settings
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
Shutter Type
e-Front Curtain Shut.
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
Zoom Speed (Remote commander) (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate
Using the flash
Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
7
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Video Light Mode
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
Lens Compensation (still image/movie)
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
Setting the monitor display during shooting
Auto Review (still image)
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Live View Display Set.
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emph disp dur REC
Marker Display
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
Recording movie audio
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
8
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Audio Level Display
TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Customizing the camera
Customization features of the camera
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key Setting)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Registering and recalling camera settings
Camera Set. Memory
Recall Camera Setting
Memory/Recall Media
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Registering frequently used functions to the function menu
Fn Menu Settings
Registering frequently used functions to My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Different Set for Still/Mv
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial
Dial Setup
9
Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Lock Operation Parts
Recording movies by pressing the shutter button
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Monitor/viewfinder settings
Select Finder/Monitor
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor/Finder)
Viewing
Viewing images
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval
Changing how images are displayed
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Setting how to jump between images
Select Image Jump Dial
10
Image Jump Method
Protecting images (Protect)
Adding information to images
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Extracting still images from a movie
Photo Capture
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture)
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
Deleting images
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
Changing the camera settings
Memory card settings
Format
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Prioritize Rec. Media
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Mode
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media
Select REC Folder
Create New Folder
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Display Media Info. (still image/movie)
File settings
File/Folder Settings
File Settings
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
11
Write Serial Number
Network settings
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Display Wi-Fi Info.
SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Airplane Mode
Edit Device Name
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
Security(IPsec)
Reset Network Set.
FTP Transfer Func.
Viewfinder/monitor settings
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Viewfinder Magnifi.
Finder Frame Rate (still image)
Power settings
Power Save Start Time
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Display Quality
USB settings
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
12
USB Power Supply
External output settings
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
HDMI Info. Display
CTRL FOR HDMI
General settings
Language
Area/Date/Time Setting
NTSC/PAL Selector
Audio signals
IR Remote Ctrl
Auto Pixel Mapping
Pixel Mapping
Version
Save/Load Settings
Setting Reset
Functions available with a smartphone
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Connecting the camera and a smartphone
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
One-touch connection with NFC
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Transferring images to a Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
Sending Target (proxy movies)
Connecting while the camera is turned OFF
Cnct. during Power OFF
Reading location information from a smartphone
13
Location Information
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Connecting/disconnecting the camera and a computer
Connecting the camera to a computer
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Managing and editing images on a computer
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop)
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Appendix
Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe
Vertical grip
Mount Adaptor
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit
Battery life and number of recordable images
Number of recordable images
List of icons on the monitor
List of default setting values
Specifications
Trademarks
License
If you have problems
Troubleshooting
Warning messages
14
5-021-326-11(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation
15
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
How to use the “Help Guide”
The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual on-screen display
of your model.)
Hint
The “Instruction Manual” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to
the “Instruction Manual” in combination with this “Help Guide”.
Finding your desired information
Method A: Searching by keyword

Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.
Method B: Viewing the table of contents

Select a heading from the table of contents to display the description page.
Screen displayed on a computer
Screen displayed on a smartphone
16
Method C: Finding functions from MENU
If you want to search for information while checking it against the MENU screen of the camera, use the “Finding
functions from MENU” page. Select a MENU item from the list to go directly to the description page.
Viewing information about related features
“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.
Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”
17
To print all the pages, select the [ Printable PDF] button in the upper right corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.
Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)
To print only the page currently being displayed, select the [ Print] button at the top of the page. When the printing
screen appears, specify your printer.
18
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Checking the camera and the supplied items
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.
Camera (1)
Battery Charger (1)
Power cord (mains lead) (1)*
* Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your country/region.
NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)
USB Type-C cable (1)
Shoulder Strap (1)
Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)
Cable Protector (1)
19
Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)
Eyepiece Cup (1) (Attached to the camera)
Instruction Manual (1)
Reference Guide (1)
20
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
This camera supports CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards (UHS-I, UHS-II compatible).
When using microSD memory cards with this camera, be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.
For still-image shooting

The following memory cards can be used.
CFexpress Type A memory cards

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
For movie recording

Movie recording formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.
File Format Maximum recordable bit rate Supported memory card
CFexpress Type A memory card

XAVC S HD 100Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 280Mbps SDXC V60 or higher

XAVC HS 4K 280Mbps SDXC V60 or higher

XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps SDXC V90 or higher
For S&Q Motion shooting

File formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.
In slow-motion recording, the recording bit rate is higher than usual. You may need a memory card that can be written at
a higher speed.

XAVC S HD 500Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*1
21

XAVC S 4K 560Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*2

XAVC HS 4K 500Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*2

XAVC S-I 4K 1200Mbps SDXC V90 or higher*3

XAVC S-I HD 890Mbps SDXC V90 or higher*4
*1 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [240fps]/[200fps], you may need an SDXC V90 memory card.
*2 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you may need an SDXC V90 memory card.
*3 For slow-motion recording, a CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher) is required.
*4 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [240fps]/[200fps], a CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher) is required.
Note
When shooting a proxy movie, a higher-speed memory card may be required.
CFexpress Type B memory cards cannot be used.
When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size.
When recording a movie on memory cards in both the Slot 1 and the Slot 2 with following camera settings, insert two memory
cards with the same file system. Movies cannot be recorded simultaneously when using a combination of the exFAT file system
and FAT32 file system.
Memory card File system
CFexpress Type A memory card, SDXC memory card exFAT
SDHC memory card FAT32
Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.
Related Topic
S&Q Settings
22
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Precautions
Refer also to “Notes on using your camera” in the Instruction Manual (supplied) for this product.
On the data specifications described in this manual
The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.
On operating temperatures
Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.
Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies
Especially during 4K shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the battery
pack or replace it with a new battery.
Notes on playing movies on other devices
XAVC HS and XAVC S movies can only be played back on compatible devices.
Notes on recording/playback
Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.
Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Database file error

If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
23
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer, and then format the memory card using this
product.
Do not use/store the product in the following places
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.
On moisture condensation
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the
product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that
if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.
Precaution on carrying
Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:
The lens part
The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.
Notes on handling the product
Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.
On storing
For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.
24
Notes on using lenses
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
When you shoot with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Otherwise, the sunlight
may enter the focus inside the camera and cause smoke or fire. Even if the sun is slightly away from the angle of
view, it may still cause smoke or fire.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. That may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.
Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)
Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)
Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)
When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.
Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)
Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)
When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may
be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
Notes on the monitor
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.
Notes on the image sensor
25
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted
areas in the images may be recorded as black areas.
On image data compatibility
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).
Services and software provided by other companies
Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.
Notes on connecting to the internet
To connect the camera to a network, connect it through a router or a LAN port with the same function. Failure to connect
in this manner may result in security issues.
Optional accessories
It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.
Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.
26
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Notes on using the battery pack
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.
Notes on charging the battery pack
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,
overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge
lamp (CHARGE) may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack and then
re-insert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be correctly charged in temperatures outside this range.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
After charging is finished, disconnect the charger from the wall outlet (wall socket) if charging with a charger, or
disconnect the USB cable from the camera if charging the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera. Not doing
so may result in a shorter battery life.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully
charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the
same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.
A: Battery level high

B: Battery exhausted
It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.
Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
27
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.
How to store the battery pack
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.
On battery life
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time
to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.
28
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If (overheating warning icon) is displayed on the monitor, do not remove the memory card from the camera right
away. Instead, wait for a while after turning off the camera, and then remove the memory card. If you touch the
memory card while it is hot, you may drop it and the memory card may be damaged. Be careful when removing the
memory card.
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC/CFexpress Type A memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV
devices not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with
exFAT before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be
prompted to format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the
card.
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards or CFexpress Type A memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Be sure to format the memory
card using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor. You may not be able to remove the
memory card.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of an SD memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot
record or delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.
Related Topic
Format
29
30
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
clean the image sensor quickly by following the steps below.
1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.
2 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Sensor Cleaning] → [Enter].
The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.
3 Turn off the camera following the instructions on the screen.
4 Detach the lens.
5 Use a commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.
Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.
6 Attach the lens.
Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php
Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is (3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.
Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.
Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.
If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.
31
During cleaning, the image sensor emits a vibrating noise. This is not a malfunction.
Cleaning may be performed automatically when the power is turned off.
Related Topic
32
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
On cleaning
Cleaning the lens
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.
Cleaning the camera body
Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens
mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
* Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.
Cleaning the product surface
Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.
Cleaning the monitor
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the monitor may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.
33
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Front side
1. Microphone
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.
2. AF illuminator/Self-timer lamp/Visible light and IR sensor

Do not cover this part during shooting.
3. ON/OFF (Power) switch/Shutter button

4. Front dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.
5. Infrared remote sensor

6. Lens release button
7. Mounting index
8. Image sensor*
9. Mount
10. Lens contacts*
* Do not directly touch these parts.
34
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Rear side
1. Eyepiece Cup
To remove the eyepiece cup

Push the grips at the bottom of the eyepiece cup to the left and right and lift up the cup.
2. Viewfinder
3. For shooting: C3 button (Custom button 3)
For viewing: (Protect) button
4. MENU button
5. Monitor (For touch operation: Touch panel/Touch pad)
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.
35
(A): Approx. 176°
(B): Approx. 270°
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
6. Eye sensor
7. Diopter-adjustment dial
Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder. If it is
hard to operate the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the eyepiece cup before operating the dial.
8. C1 button (Custom button 1)

9. For shooting: AF-ON (AF On) button
For viewing: (Enlarge) button
10. For shooting: AEL button
[AEL hold] is assigned to the AEL button in the default settings.
For viewing: (Image index) button
11. Multi-selector
12. For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by pressing this button.
13. Control wheel

14. Access lamp
15. For shooting: C4 button (Custom button 4)
For viewing: (Delete) button
16. (Playback) button
36
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Top side
1. Mode dial
The mode dial is unlocked while you hold down the unlock button at the center.
2. Rear dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.
3. Exposure compensation dial

Pressing the lock button at the center switches the exposure compensation dial between the locked and unlocked
status. The dial is unlocked when the lock button is popped up and the white line is visible.
4. MOVIE (Movie) button

5. C2 button (Custom button 2)
6. Multi Interface Shoe*
Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when
the accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.
7. Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The position of the image sensor is
indicated by (Image sensor position mark). When you measure the exact distance between the camera and
the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.
37
If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.
* For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufacturers’ accessories are not guaranteed.
38
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sides
1. HDMI type A jack

2. Speaker
3. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external
microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.
4. (Headphones) jack
5. Charge lamp
6. Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.
7. USB Type-C terminal

8. Hooks for shoulder strap
Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.
39
9. (N-Mark)
This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an NFC-enabled Smartphone.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.
10. SLOT 1 (Memory card slot 1)

11. SLOT 2 (Memory card slot 2)
* For details on compatible accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility.
Notes on USB terminals

You can use either the USB Type-C terminal or the Multi/Micro USB Terminal for USB communications. However, you
cannot conduct USB communications with both terminals simultaneously. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power
and charge the battery pack.
You can use accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, such as a remote commander (sold separately), while
supplying power or performing PC Remote shooting using the USB Type-C terminal.
Notes on the terminal cover

Ensure that the terminal cover is closed before use.
Notes on the cable protector

Use the cable protector to prevent a cable from being disconnected when shooting images with the cable connected.
To attach the cable protector
1. Open the HDMI terminal cover, headphone terminal cover, and USB terminal cover.
2. Fit the hook (A) of the cable protector into the notch (B) below the Multi/Micro USB terminal, and press down so that
it does not come off, and then attach it so that it covers the terminal surface of the unit.
3. Push the attachment screw (C) in and turn it to secure the cable protector.
40
4. Insert the cable into one of the jacks.
5. Insert the cable into the holding part and then secure the cable with the fixing dial (D).
To remove the cable protector

Loosen the attachment screw, and then remove the cable protector.
41
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bottom
1. Lock lever
2. Battery insertion slot
3. Battery cover
When attaching an accessory such as a vertical grip (sold separately), remove the battery cover.
To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.
To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by
attaching the shaft on the opposite side.
42
4. Tripod socket hole
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.
43
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
By touching the monitor, you can intuitively perform operations such as focusing on the shooting screen and operating
the playback screen.
Touch operations (on the shooting screen)
Touch the monitor to specify where to focus (Touch Focus).

Touch a subject on the monitor to use the touch tracking function (Touch Tracking).
Touch operations (on the playback screen)
During single-image playback, swipe the screen to the left or right to move to the previous or next image.
During single-image playback, you can enlarge or reduce the displayed image by moving apart or bringing together two
fingers on the screen (pinch-out/pinch-in).
You can also double-tap the monitor to enlarge a still image or exit the enlarged image.
During movie playback, you can start or pause playback using touch operations.
44
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Touch Panel/Pad
45
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the control wheel
On the menu screen or the screen displayed by pressing the Fn button, you can move the selection frame by turning the
control wheel or by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is confirmed when you
press the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting), / (Drive Mode), and ISO ( ISO) functions are assigned to the top/left/right
side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of
the control wheel, and to the rotation of the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.
Related Topic
46
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the multi-selector
You can move the focus area by pushing the multi-selector up/down/left/right. You can also assign a function to be
activated when you press the center of the multi-selector.
Put your finger right on top of the multi-selector to manipulate it more precisely.
You can move the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: S] / [Spot: M] / [Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S] / [Tracking: Spot M] / [Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
The [Focus Standard] function is assigned to the center of the multi-selector in the default settings.
Related Topic
Focus Standard
47
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the mode dial
Use the mode dial to select a shooting mode according to the subject and purpose of shooting.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock release button in the center of the mode dial.
Shooting mode details
The modes on the mode dial are divided into still image shooting modes, movie recording modes, and registration recall
modes.
(A) Still image shooting modes

(B) Movie recording modes
(C) Registration recall modes
Hint
The menu items displayed vary depending on the mode dial setting.
(A) Still image shooting modes

The shooting mode you select determines how to adjust the aperture (F value) and shutter speed.
Mode Shooting
Description
dial mode
Intelligent
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
(Auto) Auto
Program Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the
P
Auto aperture value). You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].
48
Mode Shooting
Description
dial mode
Aperture The aperture value is given priority and the shutter speed is adjusted automatically. Select this
A
Priority when you want to blur the background or focus on the entire screen.
The shutter speed is given priority and the aperture value is adjusted automatically. Select this
Shutter
S when you want to shoot a fast-moving subject without blurring, or when you want to shoot a
Priority
water or light trail.
Manual Manually adjust both the aperture value and shutter speed. You can shoot with your favorite
M
Exposure exposure.
(B) Movie recording modes
Mode dial Shooting mode Description
(Movie) Movie You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.
S&Q S&Q Motion You can set the exposure mode for S&Q Motion shooting.
The method for setting the exposure (shutter speed and aperture) in the movie recording modes depends on the MENU
→ (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Ctrl Type] setting.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode]:
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Mode] or [ Exposure Mode] → Select the desired
exposure mode from among P/A/S/M.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode]:
You can use the custom button to which [Av Auto/Manual Switch] or [Tv Auto/Manual Switch] under [Auto/Manual Swt.
Set.] is assigned to switch between the automatic setting and manual setting for each aperture value and shutter speed.
If you select the manual setting, turn the front/rear dial and set the desired value.
(C) Registration recall modes
Mode
Shooting mode Description
dial
You can call up frequently used modes and numerical value settings that have been
1/2/ Recall registered* in advance then shoot the images.
* In [ Camera Set. Memory], you can register various shooting settings, such as the exposure mode (P
3 Camera Setting
/ A / S / M), aperture (F value), and shutter speed.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Exposure Ctrl Type
Camera Set. Memory
49
50
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The menu screen is displayed by pressing the MENU button. You can change settings related to all of the camera
operations including shooting and playback, or you can execute a function from the menu screen.
(A) Menu tab

Menu tabs are categorized by usage scenario, such as shooting, playback, network settings, etc.
(B) Menu group

In each tab, menu items are grouped by function.
The number assigned to the group is the serial number in the tab. Refer to the number to determine the location of the
group in use.
(C) Menu item

Select the function you want to set or execute.
Hint
The name of the selected tab or group is displayed at the top of the screen.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], touch operations on the menu screen are possible.
Basic operations on the menu screen

1. Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
2. Move within the menu tree and find the desired menu item by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.
The displayed menu items differ between the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes.
51
(A) Menu tabs
(B) Menu groups
(C) Menu items
3. Press the center of the control wheel to select the menu item.
The setting screen or execution screen for the selected item will appear on the monitor.
4. Select a parameter or execute the function.

If you want to cancel changing the parameter, press the MENU button and go back to the previous screen.
5. Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.

You will return to the shooting screen or playback screen.
Hint
You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [
Custom Key Setting], and then pressing that key.
Relationship between the mode dial and menu screen

The menu groups and menu items displayed in the [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs vary depending on the
mode dial setting.
Still image shooting modes (AUTO/P/A/S/M)
Menu items for shooting still images are displayed.*
* Since you can record movies with the MOVIE (Movie) button even in the still image shooting mode, some basic movie menu items are also
displayed.
Movie recording modes ( /S&Q)
Menu items for recording movies are displayed.
52
Icons used in the “Help Guide”
: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes (AUTO/P/A/S/M)
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes (Movie/S&Q)
: Menu items displayed in both the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes
Related Topic
Add Item
Using the mode dial
53
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If you assign frequently used functions to the custom buttons (C1 to C4) in advance, you can quickly call up those
functions simply by pressing the button during shooting or playback.
Recommended functions are assigned to the custom buttons by default.
To check/change the functions of the custom buttons

You can confirm the function currently assigned to each custom button via the following procedure.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting], [ Custom Key Setting] or [
Custom Key Setting].
If you want to change the function of the custom button, press the center of the control wheel while the custom button is
selected. The functions that can be assigned to that button will appear. Select your desired function.
Related Topic
54
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If you press the Fn (function) button during shooting, a menu (function menu) containing frequently used functions such
as the Drive Mode and Focus Mode is displayed on the screen, allowing you to quickly call up the functions.
For details on functions that can be registered to the function menu, refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7sm3/l/function.php
Example of function menu

The displayed items differ depending on the camera status.
Hint
Use MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] →[Fn Menu Settings] to register your favorite functions in the function
menu. You can register 12 functions for shooting still images and 12 functions for shooting movies separately.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], touch operations on the menu screen are possible.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can also open [Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.
1 Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder].
2 Press the Fn (Function) button.
3 Press the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel to select a function to set.
55
4 Turn the front dial to select the desired setting, and press the center of the control wheel.
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.
Using the Fn button in the [For viewfinder] display

If you press the Fn button while the monitor display is set to [For viewfinder], you can directly operate items you want to
change.
In the auto mode
In the P/A/S/M mode
The displayed contents and their positions shown in the illustrations are just a guideline, and may differ from the
actual display.
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the icon for the desired function and then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for
the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.
56
Note
Items that are grayed out on the [For viewfinder] screen cannot be changed by pressing the Fn button.
Some settings, such as [ Creative Look] and [ Picture Profile], cannot be operated on the [For viewfinder] screen unless
you enter the dedicated setting screen.
Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings
57
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
By pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button, you can change the content displayed on the screen during shooting and
playback. The display switches each time the DISP button is pressed. The viewfinder display and the monitor display for
shooting can be set separately.
Hint
The monitor can be turned off with the DISP button. Add a check mark to [Monitor Off] under MENU → (Setup) →
[Operation Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor].
During shooting (Monitor)

Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All Info.
During shooting (Viewfinder)

Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level
To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while looking into the viewfinder.
58
During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)
Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.
If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram display
(overexposed/underexposed warning).
The settings for playback are also applied in [ Auto Review].
Note
The displayed contents and their position shown in the illustration are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
The following are not displayed in the default settings.

Monitor Off
Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)
In the movie recording modes, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed. If the monitor display is set to [For viewfinder], the display
will switch to all information when movie shooting starts.
Related Topic
59
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can delete an image currently being displayed by pressing the (Delete) button.
When a confirmation message appears after you press the (Delete) button, use the control wheel to select
[Delete] and press the center.
You can also delete two or more images at once.
Select MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete]. Then, select the images you want to delete.
Hint
Other than the single-image playback screen, you can also use the (Delete) button for the following operations.
Custom Key
In-Camera Guide
Related Topic
Delete confirm.
In-Camera Guide
60
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If the subject does not reach the proper brightness even when you point the camera toward the subject and press the
shutter button halfway down, you can press the AEL button at the desired brightness to perform metering and lock the
exposure (AE lock function). Once the exposure is locked, refocus on the subject and shoot the image.
Hint
In the default settings, [AEL hold] is assigned to the AEL button.
Related Topic
AE lock
61
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the AF-ON button
You can use the AF-ON button to adjust the focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down ([AF On] function) in
the following cases:
When you want to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.
When you want to focus and release the shutter separately.
Related Topic
AF On
62
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the front dial and rear dial
You can use the front dial (A) or rear dial (B) to quickly change the setting values in the following cases:
When you want to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed.

When you want to change the camera settings during shooting.
During playback, you can turn the dials to browse images.
You can also use the [My Dial Settings] function to assign your desired functions to the front dial/rear dial, and recall
those functions when required.
Related Topic
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Exposure Ctrl Type
Dial Setup
Av/Tv Rotate
63
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the keyboard
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen. For examples of functions that use the
keyboard, see "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page.
1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order. To
switch letters from lower to upper case, press (Up arrow).
4. (Left arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the left.
5. (Right arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right. This key is also used to finalize the input of a character being edited
and move to the next character.
6. (Delete)
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7. (Up arrow)
Switches a letter to upper or lower case.
8. (Space)
Enters a space.
9. OK
Press this key after entering characters to finalize the entered characters.
The procedure for entering alphabetic characters is explained below.
1 Use the control wheel to move the cursor to the desired key.
Each time you press the center of the control wheel, the characters will change
To switch the letter to upper or lower case, press (Up arrow).
2 When the character that you want to enter appears, press (Right arrow) to confirm the character.
Make sure to confirm one character at a time. Unless a character is confirmed, you cannot enter the next
character.
Even if you do not press (Right arrow), the entered character will be automatically confirmed after several
seconds.
3 After you finish entering all characters, press [OK] to finalize the entered characters.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].
64
Related Topic
Copyright Info
Access Point Set.
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Edit Device Name
Security(IPsec)
65
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Basic icons
This section describes the screen display when the shooting mode is (Program Auto).
The examples are of the display when the screen is in the all-information display mode.
The displayed content and positions are for reference only, and may differ from the actual display. Some icons may
not be displayed depending on the camera settings.
During still image shooting
1. The mode dial is set to (Program Auto).

2. Number of the memory card slot recording the shooting data
3. Number of still images that can be recorded on the memory card in the slot indicated by 2
4. Displayed when [AF Illuminator] is set to [Auto] and the camera detects that the AF Illuminator is required
5. [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2].
6. [JPEG Image Size] is set to [L: 5.1M].
7. [ SteadyShot] is set to [On].
8. [JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]. [JPEG Quality] is set to [Fine].
9. Remaining battery level
10. [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
11. NFC is active. [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On].
12. [ White Balance] is set to [Auto].
13. [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] is selected.
14. [ Creative Look] is set to [ST].
15. [ Picture Profile] is set to [Off].
16. [Drive Mode] is set to [Single Shooting].
17. [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF].
18. [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide].
19. [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On].
20. [Shutter Type] is set to[Mechanical Shutter].
21. Shutter speed
22. Aperture value
23. Exposure compensation
24. [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
25. [ Shooting] is set to [On] or [Auto], and the recordable area is the APS-C-equivalent size.
During movie recording
66
1. Recordable movie time for the currently displayed slot
2. [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD].
3. [ Movie Settings] is set to [60p 50M 4:2:0 8bit].
4. Actual movie recording time
5. [Audio Level Display] is set to [On].
6. [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO]. (The ISO value automatically set by the camera is displayed.)
Related Topic
67
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
In-Camera Guide
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.
1 Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).
The descriptions of the item are displayed.
68
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
1 Insert the battery pack into the battery charger.
Place the battery pack on the battery charger aligning the direction of (triangle) mark.
Slide the battery pack to the end.
2 Connect the power cord (supplied) to the battery charger, and connect the battery charger to the wall outlet
(wall socket).
When charging starts, the CHARGE lamp (A) lights up in orange.

You can check the approximate charging status with the charging status indicator lamp (B) as shown in the
following table. (The orange color indicates the lighting of the lamp.)
When the CHARGE lamp and charging status indicator lamp light up and then immediately turn off, the battery
pack is fully charged.
Charging status CHARGE lamp/Charging status indicator lamp
Immediately after attaching the battery pack - 30%
30% - 60%
60% - 90%
90% - Fully charged
Full charging completed
The charge level shown by the charging status indicator lamp and the percentages in the above table are rough
guides.
69
The actual status may differ depending on the ambient temperature and the condition of the battery pack.
Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
Note
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.
If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp
turns off.
Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”
Related Topic
70
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
1 Slide the switch on the battery cover to open the cover.
2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.
3 Close the cover and slide the switch to the LOCK side.
To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
71
Related Topic
72
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can use a USB cable to charge from an external power source, such as a commercially available USB AC adaptor
or mobile battery.
When a device compatible with USB-PD (USB Power Delivery) is connected to the camera, fast charging is possible.
1 Turn off the camera, and connect an external power source to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.
Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit; Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
Note
USB charging is not possible from the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to charge the battery pack.
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.
We recommend using a USB-PD device that is compatible with an output of 9V/3A or 9V/2A.
Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”
Related Topic
73
74
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the battery charger abroad
You can use the battery charger (supplied) in any country or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC
and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.
Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.
75
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Use an AC adaptor, etc. to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
We recommend using a USB-PD (USB Power Delivery) device that is compatible with an output of 9V/3A.
1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the
camera.
2 Connect the USB cable to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.
3 Connect to a wall outlet (wall socket) using an AC adaptor, etc.
4 Turn on the camera.
An icon ( ) indicating that USB power is being supplied will appear on the monitor, and power supply will
start.
Note
USB power cannot be supplied from the Multi/Micro USB Terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power.
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor, etc.
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor, etc.
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.
Only connect the USB cable to the camera or disconnect the USB cable from the camera while the camera is turned off.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied
from a wall outlet (wall socket).
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
Related Topic
76
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Inserting/removing a memory card
Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the camera. You can use CFexpress Type A memory cards
and SD memory cards with this camera.
1 Slide the switch on the memory card cover to open the cover.
2 Insert the memory card into the slot 1.
When using two memory cards, insert the second one into the slot 2.
Both Slot 1 and Slot 2 support CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards.
Insert a CFexpress Type A memory card with the label facing the monitor, and an SD memory card with the
terminal facing the monitor. Insert the card until it clicks into place.
3 Close the cover.
Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.
77
You can change the memory card slot for recording by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media
Settings] → [Prioritize Rec. Media]. The Slot 1 is used in the default settings.
To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the
image type (still image/movie), select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Recording Mode].
To remove the memory card

Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.
Related Topic
Format
78
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.
1 Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.
It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.
2 Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.
Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.
3 While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.
79
Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.
To remove the lens

Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.
Lens hood
We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from affecting the image. Attach
the lens hood so that the indexes on the lens and lens hood are aligned.
(There may be no lens hood index on some lenses.)
Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.
Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.
Do not use force when attaching a lens.
A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.
When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.
When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.
Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.
Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may be partially reflected in the image.
Remove the lens hood when using the flash as the lens hood blocks the flash light and may appear as a shadow on the image.
80
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
81
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time,
initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged.
1 Set the ON/OFF (Power) switch to “ON” to turn on the camera.
2 Select the desired language and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Make sure that [Enter] is selected on the area/date/time confirmation screen, and then press the center of
the control wheel.
4 Select the desired geographic location, set [Daylight Savings], and then press the center.
[Daylight Savings] can be switched on/off using the top/bottom of the control wheel.
5 Set the date format (year/month/day), and press the center.
6 Set the date and time (hour/minute/second), and press the center.
To set the date and time or geographic location again at a later point, select MENU → (Setup) →
[Area/Date] → [Area/Date/Time Setting].
On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of
whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product
for 24 hours or more with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.
Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.
The built-in clock of the camera may exhibit time errors. Adjust the time at regular intervals.
Related Topic
82
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Confirmation before shooting
This section introduces useful settings and functions that you should know when using the camera. We recommend that
you confirm these settings and functions before using the camera.
From each item name listed below, you can jump to the page explaining the respective functions.
Preparing a memory card for use with this camera

Format
Selecting a memory card for recording

Recording using two memory cards

Preventing accidental failure to insert a memory card

Release w/o Card
Selecting a memory card for playback

Setting whether camera operating sounds are generated

Audio signals
Resetting shooting settings or resetting all camera settings

Setting Reset

For information about the basics of the camera along with compatible lenses and accessories, visit the following website.
https://www.sony.net/tutorial/ilc/7sm3/
83
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
This section describes how to shoot still images in the [Intelligent Auto] mode. In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the camera
automatically focuses and automatically determines the exposure based on the shooting conditions.
1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).
2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold the camera.
3 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the zoom ring.
4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator (such as ) lights up.
5 Press the shutter button fully down.
To select the focus mode yourself ( Focus Mode / Focus Area)

Specifying a focus mode, such as selecting (Single-shot AF) for landscapes or still subjects and selecting
(Continuous AF) for moving subjects, makes it easier to focus on the desired subject. You can also specify the focus
position and range using [ Focus Area].
Shooting while focusing on human eyes
84
The [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function under [Face/Eye AF] is enabled in the default settings, so you can use the Eye
AF function immediately.
To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
When you focus on the subject, the focus is locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway down. Switch to the
desired composition and press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.
You can lock the focus on non-moving subjects. Set [ Focus Mode] to (Single-shot AF).
Setting [ Focus Area] to [Center Fix] makes it easier to focus on subjects located in the center of the screen.
Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus setting. In [Continuous AF] mode, (focus indicator) lights up and the beep indicating that the focus
has been achieved does not sound.
Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed. Doing so will prevent images from being recorded normally.
Related Topic
85
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shooting movies
You can set the recording format and exposure and record movies by using the dedicated menu items for movies.
1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2 Press the MOVIE (Movie) button to start recording.
3 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
To select the recording format ( File Format)

The resolution and degree of compatibility vary depending on the recording format (XAVC HS 4K/XAVC S 4K/XAVC S
HD/XAVC S-I 4K/XAVC S-I HD). Select the format in accordance with the purpose of the movie to be shot.
To select the frame rate or image quality ( Movie Settings)

The frame rate determines the smoothness of motion in movies. ([ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate])
The image quality changes with the bit rate. ([ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting])
If the bit rate is high, the amount of information will increase and you can shoot high-quality movies. However, this will
result in a larger volume of data.
Select the frame rate and bit rate according to your preference and purpose.
To adjust the exposure (Exposure Ctrl Type/Exposure Mode)

When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode], select the exposure mode using the shutter speed and aperture
value combination in the same way as when shooting a still image.
86
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], you can set both the shutter speed and aperture value
automatically or manually.
To select the focusing method ( Focus Mode/ Focus Area)

Select (Continuous AF) or (Manual Focus) for [ Focus Mode]. You can specify the focus area by
setting [ Focus Area].
Even during shooting with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to auto focus in the following ways.
Press the custom key to which [AF On] is assigned, or press the shutter button halfway.
Press the custom key to which [Eye AF] is assigned.
Touch the subject on the monitor.
To record movie audio in 4 channels

Attach a genuine Sony accessory that supports 4-channel and 24-bit audio recording to the Multi Interface Shoe of the
camera.
Hint
You can also assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.
You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)
You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.
The sounds of the camera and lens in operation may be recorded during movie shooting. To prevent sounds from being
recorded, set [Audio Recording] to [Off].
To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded when a power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording
movies using the zoom lever. When moving the zoom lever, be careful not to flip the lever.
Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
You cannot start recording a movie while writing data. Wait until data writing is completed and “STBY” is displayed before
recording a movie.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera
and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Exposure Ctrl Type
Shoe Audio Set.
87
Audio Recording
88
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The displayed MENU items vary depending on the position of the mode dial. In the table below, the modes in which each
MENU item is displayed are indicated by the still image/movie icons.
: The menu item is displayed when the mode dial position is set to the still image shooting modes (A).
: The menu item is displayed when the mode dial position is set to the movie recording modes (B).
: The menu item is displayed when the mode dial position is set to either the still image shooting modes (A) or
the movie recording modes (B).
When the mode dial is set to 1, 2, or 3 ( Recall Camera Setting), the displayed menu items are determined by
the mode registered to each registration number.
(Shooting) tab
Groups Menu items
Image Quality JPEG/HEIF Switch
File Format
RAW File Type
JPEG Quality
HEIF Quality
JPEG Image Size
HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
File Format
Movie Settings
S&Q Settings
Proxy Settings
Shooting
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
89
Groups Menu items
HLG Still Image
Color Space
Lens Compensation
Format
Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media
Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

Media
Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media
Recover Image DB
Display Media Info.
Select REC Folder
Create New Folder
File IPTC Information
Copyright Info
Write Serial Number
File Settings
Exposure Mode
Exposure Mode
Exposure Ctrl Type
Shooting Mode Recall Camera Setting
Camera Set. Memory
Memory/Recall Media
Reg. Custom Shoot Set
Drive Mode: Single Shooting
Drive Mode: Cont. Shooting
Drive Mode: Self-timer(Single)
Drive Mode: Self-timer(Cont)
Drive Mode: Cont. Bracket

Drive Mode
Drive Mode: Single Bracket
Drive Mode: WB bracket
Drive Mode: DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
90
Groups Menu items
Silent Mode Settings
Shutter Type

Shutter/Silent
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing

Audio Recording
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Audio Level Display
Time Code Preset
User Bit Preset
Time Code Format

TC/UB
Time Code Run
Time Code Make
User Bit Time Rec
SteadyShot
SteadyShot
Image Stabilization
SteadyShot Adjust.
Focal Length
Zoom
Zoom Range
Zoom
Zoom Speed
Zoom Speed
Grid Line Display
Grid Line Type

Shooting Display
Emph disp dur REC
Marker Display Marker Display
Center Marker
Aspect Marker
91
Groups Menu items
Safety Zone
Guideframe
(Exposure/Color) tab
Groups Menu items
Auto Slow Shutter
ISO
Exposure ISO Range Limit
ISO AUTO Min. SS
Exposure Comp.
Reset EV Comp.
Exposure Comp.
Exposure step
Exposure Std. Adjust
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering

Metering
Spot Metering Point
AEL w/ Shutter
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Flash
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
External Flash Set.
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB

White Balance
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
D-Range Optimizer
Color/Tone Creative Look
Picture Profile
Zebra Display
Zebra Display
Zebra Level
92
(Focus) tab
Groups Menu items
Focus Mode
AF Illuminator
AF/MF
AF w/ Shutter
Pre-AF
AF Transition Speed
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Switch V/H AF Area
Focus Area Color
AF Area Registration
Focus Area Del. Regist. AF Area
AF Area Auto Clear
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
Circ. of Focus Point
AF Frame Move Amt
Face/Eye Prior. in AF
Face/Eye Subject
Right/Left Eye Select

Face/Eye AF
Face/Eye Frame Disp.
Face Memory
Regist. Faces Priority
Focus Assistant Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag.
AF in Focus Mag.
93
Groups Menu items
Initial Focus Mag.
Peaking Display
Peaking Display Peaking Level
Peaking Color
(Playback) tab
Groups Menu items
Select Playback Media

Playback Target
View Mode
Enlarge Image
Magnification Enlarge Initial Mag.
Protect
Selection/Memo Rating
Delete
Delete
Delete confirm.
Rotate
Copy
Edit
Photo Capture
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Viewing Play Speed for Interval
Slide Show
Image Index
Display as Group
Display Rotation
Playback Option
Focus Frame Display
Image Jump Method
(Network) tab
Groups Menu items
94
Groups Menu items
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
Sending Target
Transfer/Remote Cnct. during Power OFF
FTP Transfer Func.
PC Remote Function
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Location Info Link
Location Information Auto Time Correction
Auto Area Adjustment
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Frequency Band
Display Wi-Fi Info.
SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Function
Bluetooth Pairing
Disp Device Address
IP Address Setting
Wired LAN
Display Wired LAN Info.
Airplane Mode
Edit Device Name
Network Option Import Root Certificate
Security(IPsec)
Reset Network Set.
(Setup) tab
Groups Menu items
Language
Area/Date Area/Date/Time Setting
NTSC/PAL Selector
Setting Reset
Reset/Save Settings
Save/Load Settings
95
Groups Menu items
Custom Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Fn Menu Settings
Operation Customize
DISP (Screen Disp) Set
REC w/ Shutter
Zoom Ring Rotate
My Dial Settings
Dial Setup
Av/Tv Rotate
Dial Customize
Dial Ev Comp
Function Ring(Lens)
Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Operation
Touch Pad Settings
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder/Monitor Finder Color Temp.
Viewfinder Magnifi.
Display Quality
Finder Frame Rate
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Display Option Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
Remain Shoot Display
Auto Review
Power Setting Option Power Save Start Time
96
Groups Menu items
Volume Settings
Sound Option 4ch Audio Monitoring
Audio signals
USB Connection
USB USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Output Settings

External Output
HDMI Info. Display
CTRL FOR HDMI
Video Light Mode
IR Remote Ctrl
Sensor Cleaning
Setup Option
Auto Pixel Mapping
Pixel Mapping
Version
(My Menu) tab
Groups Menu items
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
My Menu Setting
Delete Page
Delete All
Note
The order in which the menu tabs are listed here differs from the actual display.
97
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Using the shooting functions”). From each
item name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Selecting a shooting mode

Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Bulb shooting
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto Slow Shutter
Focusing
Face/Eye AF
Face Memory
Using the AF functions

Focus Standard
AF Area Auto Clear
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Transition Speed
AF/MF Selector
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
98
AF in Focus Mag.
AF Illuminator
Using the MF functions

Manual Focus
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes

Histogram display
Dial Ev Comp
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Zebra Display
Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO AUTO Min. SS
White balance
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
Adding effects to images

Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)

Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
99
Setting the image quality and recording format

RAW File Type
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
S&Q Settings
Proxy Settings
Angle of view
Using touch functions

Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Pad Settings
Shutter settings
Shutter Type
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Using the zoom

About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate
Using the flash

Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Video Light Mode
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (movie)
100
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
Setting the monitor display during shooting

Aperture Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emph disp dur REC
Marker Display
Recording movie audio

Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Audio Level Display
TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting
101
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Intelligent Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).
2 Point the camera at the subject.
When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
About Scene Recognition

The Scene Recognition function allows the camera to automatically recognize shooting conditions.
When the camera recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed at the top of the screen:
(Portrait), (Infant), (Night Portrait), (Night Scene), (Backlight Portrait), (Backlight),
(Landscape), (Macro), (Spotlight), (Low Light), (Night Scene using a tripod)
Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.
For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
102
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].
1 Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).
2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the front/rear dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.
“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the front/rear dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.
Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.
103
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
1 Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
Related Topic
Aperture Preview
104
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shutter Priority
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the
instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.
1 Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.
When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be done after
shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in
progress.
Related Topic
Long Exposure NR
105
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2 Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.

Select the desired shutter speed by turning the rear dial.
You can change the setting of the front/rear dial using MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Dial
Setup].
You can also set [ ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable
for appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use “M.M.” (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the camera.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using a numerical value on the monitor and with a metering indicator on
the viewfinder.
Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value by rotating the
front/rear dial while pressing the AEL button. (Manual shift)
Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
Related Topic
Bulb shooting
106
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bulb shooting
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.
1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2 Turn the rear dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3 Select the aperture value (F-value) using the front dial.
5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.
Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the
focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.
In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.
During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod, a Bluetooth remote commander (sold
separately) or a remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When using the Bluetooth remote
commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop bulb shooting, press
the shutter button on the remote commander again. To use the other remote commander, use the model which can be connected
via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.
Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter was
open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.
Related Topic
Manual Exposure
107
Long Exposure NR
108
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Exposure Ctrl Type
You can select the method for setting the exposure (shutter speed and aperture) when shooting movies. With [P/A/S/M
Mode], you can select from the P/A/S/M modes in the same way as the exposure mode for still images. With [Flexible
Exp. Mode], you can switch between the automatic and manual settings separately for aperture value and shutter speed,
like the exposure control system of a professional camera.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Ctrl Type] → desired setting.
Menu item details

P/A/S/M Mode:
Select the desired exposure mode from among [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], and [Manual
Exposure].
Flexible Exp. Mode:
Sets the aperture value and shutter speed automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual).
You can switch between the automatic and manual settings using the assigned custom key, or change the aperture and
shutter speed values by turning the front/rear dials.
Note
Even if [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], when shooting a movie by pressing the MOVIE (movie) button in a still
image shooting mode, the movie will be shot in the exposure mode for still image shooting.
Related Topic
109
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
When shooting movies, you can switch between the automatic and manual settings separately for aperture and shutter
speed, as you would with the exposure control system of a professional camera. Set [Exposure Ctrl Type] to [Flexible
Exp. Mode] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto/Manual Swt. Set.] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Av Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the aperture value between [Auto] and [Manual].
Tv Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the shutter speed between [Auto] and [Manual].
To switch between [Auto] and [Manual] using a custom keys

When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], the following functions are assigned to the custom keys during
movie recording.
[Av Auto/Manual Switch]: C2 (Custom 2) button

[Tv Auto/Manual Switch]: C1 (Custom 1) button
Each time you press the respective custom key, the aperture value or shutter speed switches between [Auto] and
[Manual].
When [Auto] is selected, the proper exposure is set automatically, and when [Manual] is selected, the aperture value and
shutter speed can be set with the following dials.
Aperture value: rear dial
Shutter speed: front dial
Note
When you set the aperture value with the lens aperture ring, the aperture ring value takes priority over the dial value.
Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type
110
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting. The setting you have selected will be applied when [Exposure Ctrl
Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode].
1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2 MENU→ (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type
111
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. The setting you have selected will be applied
when [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode].
You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [ S&Q Settings].
1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).
2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Program Auto:
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Related Topic
S&Q Settings
Exposure Ctrl Type
112
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Auto Slow Shutter
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode] and the method for adjusting the shutter speed is set to [Manual]
113
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Single-shot AF:
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
Automatic AF:
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with [Continuous AF]
from the second shot.
Continuous AF:
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
DMF:
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using [Manual Focus] from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
Manual Focus:
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use [Manual Focus].
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
114
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.
When you set the focus to infinity in [Manual Focus] mode or [DMF] mode, make sure that the focus is on a sufficiently distant
subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.
Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.
When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to (S&Q
Motion).
Related Topic
Manual Focus
115
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Set the type of focusing frame when shooting with the auto focus. Select the mode according to the subject.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Wide:
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone:
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center Fix:
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L:

Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Spot:
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the [Spot] as a secondary priority area
for focusing.
Tracking:
This setting is available only when the [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. When the shutter button is pressed
and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor at [Tracking]
on the [ Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the
control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a [Tracking:
Zone], [Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L] or [Tracking: Expand Spot].
Hint
In the default settings, [ Focus Area] is assigned to the C2 button.
Note
[ Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the
[ Focus Area].
116
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.
When focusing on a larger area
When focusing on a smaller area
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a
larger area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [ Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
To move the focus area

You can move the focus area by operating the multi-selector when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
117
If you assign [Focus Standard] to the center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can move the focusing frame back
to the center of the monitor by pressing the center of the multi-selector.
Hint
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot] or [Expand Spot], you can move the focusing frame over a greater distance at a time with
the multi-selector by setting [ AF Frame Move Amt] to [Large].
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On], and set
[Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)

You can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key
to which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [ Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On]
will switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
[ Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [ Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
[Spot: S] [Tracking: Spot S]
[Expand Spot] [Tracking: Expand Spot]
Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.
Note
Phase detection AF is available only when a compatible lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.
[Automatic AF]
[AF Tracking Sensitivity]
[AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity]
[AF Transition Speed]
Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
118
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.
You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [ Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Touch Func. in
Shooting])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or
[DMF].
Changing the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] under [
Custom Key Setting])
Even [ Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to
[Tracking] while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.
Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] in advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Related Topic
119
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The camera can automatically detect faces and eyes and focus on the eyes (Eye AF). The following explanation is for
cases where the detection target is human. The faces of up to 8 subjects can be detected.
There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.
Item [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function [Eye AF] via a custom key
The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater

Characteristics The camera will detect faces/eyes exclusively.
priority.
Select [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] → [On]. Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
Advance
Select [ Face/Eye Subject] → [Human]. Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key
preparation
Setting].
How to
Press the key to which you have assigned the
perform [Eye Press the shutter button halfway down.
[Eye AF] function*.
AF]
When the camera detects a face or eye inside The camera focuses exclusively on faces
or around the designated focus area, it focuses or eyes anywhere on the screen,
on the face or eye with greater priority. regardless of the setting for [ Focus
Function If the camera does not detect any faces or Area].
details eyes inside or around the designated focus The camera will not automatically focus
area, it will focus on another detectable on another subject if no face or eye is
subject. detected anywhere on the screen.
Follows the setting designated with [ Focus Follows the setting designated with [
Focus mode
Mode] Focus Mode]
The focus area temporarily becomes the

Follows the setting designated with [ Focus
Focus area entire screen, regardless of the setting for [
Area]
Focus Area].
* Regardless of whether [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while you are pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].
[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as you
are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [ Focus Area].
The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [ Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it
performs normal auto-focusing.)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting] →
desired key, then assign the [Eye AF] function to the key.
2. MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Subject] → [Human].
120
3. Point the camera at the face of a human, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF] function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
To focus on the eyes of an animal

Set [ Face/Eye Subject] to [Animal] before shooting. If the detection target is an animal, eyes can be detected only
when shooting still images. Animal faces are not detected.
Note
The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much
There are also other situations in which it may not be possible to focus on the eyes.
When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.
The camera may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.
Related Topic
121
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not the camera detects faces or eyes inside the focus area while performing autofocus, and then
focuses on the eyes automatically (Eye AF).
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Focuses on the faces or eyes with priority if there are faces or eyes inside or around the designated focus area.
Off:
Does not prioritize faces or eyes when performing auto-focusing.
Hint
By combining the [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function with [ Focus Area] → [Tracking], you can maintain focus on a moving
eye or face.
When [Face/Eye Priority Select] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you
can switch the [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function on or off by pressing the key.
Note
If the camera does not detect any faces or eyes inside or around the designated focus area, it will focus on another detectable
subject.
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is locked to [On].
Related Topic
122
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the target to be detected with the Face/Eye AF function.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Subject] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Human:
Detects human faces/eyes.
Animal:
Detects animal eyes.
Hint
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
Note
When [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Regist. Faces Priority
Eye detection function during movie recording
Even when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.
Related Topic
123
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to focus on the left eye or right eye when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Human].
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Right/Left Eye Select] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically detects either the left eye or right eye.
Right Eye:
The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Left Eye:
The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

You can also switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing
the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel

Pressing the center of the multi-selector
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
The eye detection frame is displayed when [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], or when [Switch
Right/Left Eye] is executed with the custom key. During movie recording, the eye detection frame will be displayed when [
Face/Eye Frame Disp.] is set to [On], even if [Auto] is selected in [ Right/Left Eye Select].
Related Topic
124
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays a detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.
Off:
Does not display a detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.
Face detection frame

When the camera detects a face, the gray face-detection frame appears. The frame color will be reddish purple if the
detected face has been registered using the [Face Memory] function.
The face detection frame turns white when the face is detected inside or around the focus area, and the camera
determines that autofocus is enabled.
Eye detection frame

A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal].
Hint
125
If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
Note
If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.
The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.
Even if [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or eyes that are in focus.
Related Topic
Face Memory
126
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Face Memory
Sets personal face data. If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
Up to eight faces can be registered.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [Face Memory] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

New Registration:
Shoots and registers faces.
Order Exchanging:
When multiple faces are registered, the order of priority for the registered face data can be changed.
Delete:
Deletes registered faces one by one.
Delete All:
Deletes all registered faces at once.
Note
When performing [New Registration], shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly
if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].
Related Topic
127
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Memory].
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Memory].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.
Hint
To use the [ Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] under [Face/Eye AF]: [On]
[ Face/Eye Subject] under [Face/Eye AF]: [Human]
Related Topic
Face Memory
128
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Focus Standard
If you press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can recall useful functions such as automatically
focusing on a subject in the center of the screen in accordance with the focus area settings.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting]
→ desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard] function to the key.
2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [ Focus Area].
Examples of [Focus Standard] key functions

When [ Focus Area] is set to any of the following parameters, pressing the key moves the focusing frame back to
the center:
[Zone]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center Fix], [Tracking: Wide], or [Tracking: Center Fix], pressing the key in
the autofocus mode makes the camera focus on the center of the screen. If you press the key while recording a
movie with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to autofocus and focus on the center of the screen.
Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
Related Topic
129
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)
You can set whether to switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of
the camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [
Focus Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected
(A) Vertical: [Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)
Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.
Note
If the setting for [Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.
The [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point
+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
130
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.
The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.
Related Topic
131
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.
How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF
Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.
If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.
If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.
Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock
You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].
You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or (S&Q Motion)
When [AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts] setting is locked to [Off].
Related Topic
132
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [AF Area Registration].
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Del. Regist. AF Area].
Related Topic
133
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [ Focus
Area].
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas
that you want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.
Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], the focus
area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas with [ Focus Area Limit]
in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [ Focus Area Limit].
If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [Switch V/H AF Area] or [AF Area Registration], the registered
settings will change.
Related Topic
134
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame. This
function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.
The function can be used when the following settings are selected for [ Focus Area].
[Zone]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.
When [Circulate] is selected:
Menu item details

Does Not Circulate:
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate:
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Note
Even if you set [ Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not circulate diagonally.
Related Topic
135
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot], etc. You can quickly
move the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].
Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting],
the [ AF Frame Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.
If any of the following functions is assigned to the control wheel using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting],
you can move the focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame Move
Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
If any of the following functions is assigned to the front/rear dials or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the
focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
Related Topic
136
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Color] → desired color.
Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
Related Topic
137
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
Related Topic
138
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF-C Area Display
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF-C Area Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [ Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center Fix]
[Spot]
[Expand Spot]
Related Topic
139
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Phase Detect. Area
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.
Note
Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase
Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that
have not been updated. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or
local authorized Sony service facility.
When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase
Detect. Area] is set to [On].
When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.
140
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Tracking Sensitivity] → desired setting.
Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3(Standard)/2/1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.
Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.
141
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF Transition Speed
Sets the speed at which the focus position is moved when the target of the auto focus is switched during movie shooting.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details

7 (Fast)/6/5/4/3/2/1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.
142
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the sensitivity with which the focus switches to another subject when the original subject leaves the focus area
during movie shooting.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity] → desired setting.
Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3/2/1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.
143
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF/MF Selector
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.
→ desired button → [AF/MF Selector Hold] or [AF/MF Selector Toggle].
Menu item details

AF/MF Selector Hold:
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Selector Toggle:
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.
Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Selector Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
Related Topic
144
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF w/ Shutter
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.
Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you
focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.
1. Set [AF w/ Shutter] to [Off].

2. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting] →
assign the [Focus Magnifier] function to the desired key.
3. Press the AF-ON button to focus.
4. Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-
adjustments of the focus.
5. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
Related Topic
AF On
Focus Magnifier
Pre-AF
145
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF On
You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [ Focus Mode] will be applied.
1 Press the AF-ON (AF On) button while shooting.
When shooting a movie, you can perform auto-focusing while holding down the AF-ON button even in the
manual focusing mode.
Hint
Set [AF w/ Shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.
Set [AF w/ Shutter] and [Pre-AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.
Related Topic
AF w/ Shutter
Pre-AF
146
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Focus Hold
Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.
→ assign the [Focus Hold] function to the desired key.
2 Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.
3 Press the shutter button while holding down the key.
Related Topic
147
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Pre-AF
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Pre-AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
[Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.
During focusing operations, the screen may shake.
148
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.
Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Related Topic
149
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the
subject is in motion.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.
Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Related Topic
150
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF in Focus Mag.
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].
2 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].
3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the multi-selector, and then adjust the position by pressing the
multi-selector up/down/left/right.
The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

The focus will be achieved at point of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.
5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.
Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.
You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.
The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.
[AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[Pre-AF]
[ Face/Eye Prior. in AF]
151
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
152
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AF Illuminator
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
If a flash with an AF illuminator function is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, when the flash is turned on, the AF
illuminator of the flash will turn on as well.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Illuminator] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.
Note
You cannot use [AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator /
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When a Mount Adaptor is attached.
The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.
153
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].
Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].
When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.
The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.
Related Topic
154
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].
2 Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.
When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Display
155
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [DMF].
2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.
When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Peaking Display
156
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Auto Magnifier in MF] → [On].
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [
Focus Magnif. Time].
Note
You cannot use [Auto Magnifier in MF] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
[Auto Magnifier in MF] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
157
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [Auto Magnifier in MF], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].
2 Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge by
pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial
Focus Mag.] or [ Initial Focus Mag.].
3 Confirm the focus.
Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [AF in Focus
Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus
Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time].
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can
perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the multi-selector.
Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
158
AF in Focus Mag.
Touch Operation
159
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [Auto Magnifier in MF] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
160
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Full-frame shooting
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x2.1:
Displays a 2.1-times enlarged image.
APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting
x1.0:
x1.5:
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
161
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] →[ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

x1.0:
x4.0:
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
162
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Peaking Display
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.
1 MENU → (Focus) → [Peaking Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking. ([On] / [Off])
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas. ([High] / [Mid] / [Low])
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas. ([Red] / [Yellow] / [Blue] / [White])
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
163
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [ Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
1 Release the exposure compensation dial lock, and turn the exposure compensation dial.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
Pressing the lock button at the center switches the exposure compensation dial between the locked and
unlocked status. The dial is unlocked when the lock button is popped up and the white line is visible.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor
Viewfinder
To set the exposure compensation value using the MENU

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV when the exposure compensation
dial is set to “0.”
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.
Hint
164
You can operate the exposure compensation dial any time you want while the exposure compensation dial lock is released. The
exposure compensation dial lock prevents unintentional changes to exposure compensation values.
The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [ Exposure Comp.] or [Dial Ev Comp] in MENU.
Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the exposure value switches to “0” regardless
of the [ Exposure Comp.] setting.
Related Topic
Dial Ev Comp
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Display
165
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance.
To display the histogram on the shooting screen or playback screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button repeatedly.
How to read the histogram

The histogram indicates darker values toward the left and brighter values toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.
(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness
Note
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.
The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene
Related Topic
166
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [ Exposure Comp.] when you turn off the power when the
exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color)→ [Exposure Comp.]→ [ Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Maintain:
Maintains the settings.
Reset:
Resets the settings.
Related Topic
167
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure step] → desired setting.
Menu item details

0.5EV / 0.3EV
Note
Even if you set [ Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using the exposure compensation dial changes in
steps of 0.3EV.
Related Topic
168
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering

mode.
2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.
You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight
Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.
The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.
The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust].
The value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The
amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.
If you set [ Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.
Related Topic
169
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Dial Ev Comp
You can adjust the exposure using the front dial or rear dial when the exposure compensation dial is set to “0.” You can
adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
1 Set the exposure compensation dial to "0."
2 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Dial Ev Comp] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not enable exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.
Front dial / Rear dial:
Enables exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.
Note
When the exposure compensation function is assigned to the front or rear dial, any function that had been assigned to that dial
previously is re-assigned to another dial.
The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [ Exposure Comp.] in MENU or the exposure settings
using the front or rear dial.
Related Topic
170
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ D-Range Optimizer] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not adjust brightness and gradation.
D-Range Optimizer:
If you select [D-Range Optimizer: Auto], the camera will automatically adjust the brightness and gradation. To optimize
the gradation of a recorded image by individual areas, select an optimization level from [D-Range Optimizer: Lv1] (weak)
to [D-Range Optimizer: Lv5] (strong).
Note
In the following situations, [ D-Range Optimizer] is fixed to [Off]:
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
171
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [ Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
The spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area by using [Focus Point Link].
When [Multi] is selected and [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on
detected faces.
When [ Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] function is activated, the brightness and the contrast
will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make
settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
172
173
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On] and [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF], [ Face
Priority in Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
174
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:

[Expand Spot]
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Note
Even if the spot metering position is coordinated with the [Tracking] start position, it will not be coordinated with the tracking of the
subject.
When [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters, the spot metering position is locked to the center.
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]/[Tracking: Zone]/[Tracking: Center Fix]
Related Topic
175
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.
1 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
2 Press the AEL button.
The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.
3 Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again, then shoot the picture.
Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want to continue shooting with the fixed exposure.
Release the button to reset the exposure.
Hint
If you assign the [AEL toggle] function to the AEL button using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you can
lock the exposure without holding down the button.
Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.
Related Topic
176
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
AEL w/ Shutter
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [AEL w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [
Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines
that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.
Note
Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [AEL w/ Shutter] settings.
177
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Zebra Display
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Zebra Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern. ([Off] / [On])
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern. ([70] / [75] / [80] / [85] / [90]/ [95] / [100] / [100+])
Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [ Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom 1] and [Custom 2]
respectively in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
178
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
1 ISO on the control wheel → select desired setting.
You can also select MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO].
You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the front dial as well as by turning the control wheel. You
can change the value by 1 EV steps by turning the rear dial.
Menu item details

ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 40 – ISO 409600:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 80 and 409600 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 80, the
setting is automatically switched to 80. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [ Picture Profile].
The available ISO sensitivity range changes when outputting RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI.
Note
[ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 80, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted areas in
the images may be recorded as black areas.
179
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and

select the desired values.
To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].
Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ ISO Range Limit].
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [ Picture Profile].
Related Topic
180
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
ISO AUTO Min. SS
If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.
Menu item details

SLOWER (Slower)/SLOW (Slow):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
FAST (Fast)/FASTER (Faster):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Slower], [Slow], [Standard], [Fast], and [Faster]
is 1 EV.
Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/250
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)
Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
181
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto / Auto: Ambience / Auto: White / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy /
Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White / Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight
/ Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the rear dial instead of
pressing the right side of the control wheel.
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
(Auto: Ambience), (Auto: White) is displayed only when [ Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
If you want to moderate abrupt white balance switching, such as when the recording environment switches during movie
recording, you can change the white balance switching speed with the [Shockless WB] function.
Note
[ White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Do not cover the visible light and IR sensor when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto]. If you do so, the light source may be
erroneously classified, and the white balance may be adjusted to an inappropriate color.
Related Topic
WB bracket
182
Shockless WB
183
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1]
to [Custom 3], and then press the right side of the control wheel.
2 Select (custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
No shutter sound is produced in the following cases.
In the movie recording mode
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On]
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]
4 Press the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.
Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When
an error value is set, the indicator (custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator
will be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.
If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.
184
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [ White
Balance] is set to [Auto].
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
185
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shutter AWB Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [ White Balance] is set
to [Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Shutter Half Press:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.
About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.
If you want to lock the white balance while recording a movie in the auto white-balance mode, also assign [AWB Lock
Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] to the custom key.
Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting], and
do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [ White Balance] to
[Flash].
Related Topic
186
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shockless WB
Sets the speed at which the white balance switches during movie recording, such as when the setting for [ White
Balance] or [ Priority Set in AWB] is changed.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shockless WB] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
The white balance will switch immediately if you change the white balance setting during movie recording.
1 (Fast)/2/3 (Slow):
You can select the speed at which the white balance switches during movie shooting in order to make the white balance
of the movie change more smoothly.
The speed settings in the order of fastest to slowest are [1 (Fast)], [2], and [3 (Slow)].
Note
This function does not affect the speed at which the white balance changes when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto].
Even if a setting other than [Off] is selected, the following will be immediately applied to the movie regardless of the speed
setting.
Fine adjustments to the color tones
Changes to the color temperature using [C.Temp./Filter]
Related Topic
187
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
“Looks” are presets for image creation preinstalled on the camera.

With this function, you can choose the finish of the image by selecting a “Look.” In addition, you can fine-tune the
contrast, highlights, shadows, fade, saturation, sharpness, sharpness range, and clarity for each “Look.”
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Creative Look].
2 Select the desired “Look” or [Custom Look] using the top/bottom of the control wheel.
3 To adjust (Contrast), (Highlights), (Shadows), (Fade), (Saturation), (Sharpness),

(Sharpness Range) and (Clarity), move to the right using the right side of the control wheel. Select the
desired item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
4 When selecting [Custom Look], move to the right using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired “Look.”
Using [Custom Look], you can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.
Menu item details

ST:
Standard finish for a wide range of subjects and scenes.
PT:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
NT:
188
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
VV:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
VV2:
Creates an image with bright and vivid colors with rich clarity.
FL:
Creates an image with moody finish by applying sharp contrast to the calm coloring as well as the impressive sky and
colors of the greens.
IN:
Creates an image with matte textures by suppressing the contrast and saturation.
SH:
Creates an image with bright, transparent, soft, and vivid mood.
BW:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
SE:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Custom Look):
Select the six custom look (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the
desired settings using the right button.
You can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.
To adjust in greater detail

Based on each “Look,” items such as contrast can be adjusted to your liking. You can adjust not only the preset “Looks,”
but also each [Custom Look], a function that allows you to register your favorite settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
When a setting value is changed from the default value, (asterisk) is added next to the “Look” icon displayed on the
shooting screen.
Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image. (-9 to +9)
Highlights:
Adjusts the brightness of the bright areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Shadows:
Adjusts the darkness of the dark areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Fade:
Adjusts the degree of fade. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued. (-9 to +9)
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened. (0 to 9)
Sharpness Range:
Adjust the range where the sharpness effect is applied. A larger value makes the sharpness effect apply to finer outlines.
(1 to 5)
Clarity:
Adjusts the degree of clarity. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
To reset adjusted values for each “Look”

Adjusted values such as contrast that you have changed as desired can be collectively reset for each “Look.” Press the
(delete) button on the adjustment screen for the “Look” that you want to reset. All adjusted values that have been
189
changed will return to their default values.
Hint
For [Sharpness], [Sharpness Range], and [Clarity], take a test shot and either enlarge and play it on the camera monitor, or
output it to a playback device to check the effect. Then, readjust the setting if needed.
Note
[ Creative Look] is fixed to [ST] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [BW] or [SE], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
In the movie mode, [Sharpness Range] cannot be adjusted.
190
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Although [ Picture Profile] can be used for both still images and movies, the function is designed for movies.
Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
191
HDR movie recording
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4],
[ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].
192
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
193
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → [Copy].
To reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
If you want to select different settings for movies and still images, add a check mark to [Picture Profile] under [Different Set for
Still/Mv].
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].
When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
Related Topic
194
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode].
2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details

Single Shooting:
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer(Single):
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
195
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Cont. Shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].
You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive
Mode].
Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi+ :
Images are shot continuously at the maximum speed while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous Shooting: Lo:
Subjects are easier to track because the subject is displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder during shooting.
Number of still images recordable with continuous shooting

The following table shows estimated numbers of recordable still images with [Drive Mode] set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi+]. The numbers may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.
Image Size: [L:12M]
Number of images when JPEG is Number of images when HEIF is

File Format
selected selected
JPEG/HEIF (Fine) Approx. 1000 images or more Approx. 1000 images or more
RAW (Compressed RAW) Approx. 1000 images or more Approx. 1000 images or more
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF

Approx. 1000 images or more Approx. 1000 images or more
(Compressed RAW)*
RAW (Uncompressed RAW) Approx. 1000 images or more Approx. 1000 images or more
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF

Approx. 1000 images or more Approx. 1000 images or more
(Uncompressed RAW)*
* When [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] is set to [Fine].
Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[ Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[AEL w/ Shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]
Note
196
When the F-value is greater than F11 in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi] or [Continuous Shooting: Mid]
mode, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.
The subject is not displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder when shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.
The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.
Related Topic
AEL w/ Shutter
197
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Self-timer(Single)
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Single)].

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.
Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.
Self-timer(Single): 10 sec
Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.
To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive
Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].
Related Topic
Audio signals
198
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Self-timer(Cont)
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.
Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
199
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.
1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].

The base exposure is set at the first shot.
Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.
Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.
Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
200
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].

Press the shutter button for each image.
Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
201
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)

Ambient light* bracketing
Flash bracketing
Flash compensation -1.0 EV
Monitor (For viewfinder)

Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)
Flash bracketing (lower indicator)

Flash compensation -1.0 EV
* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."
Hint
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.
When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.
202
203
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
WB bracket
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].
Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
*MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."
Hint
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
204
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.
1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].
Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).
Hint
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
205
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(Off/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
206
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). On this camera, you cannot create a movie from still images produced by interval shooting.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → Select an item to set, and then select
the desired setting.
3 Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([Off]/[On])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval:
Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([Off]/[On])
Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
To return to the normal shooting mode, set [Interval Shooting] to [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
207
[AF/MF Selector Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
Related Topic
208
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the file format for still images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ File Format] → desired setting.
Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF:
A RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files,
a JPEG or HEIF for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG/HEIF:
The image is recorded in the JPEG or HEIF format.
About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel.
You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed using [RAW File Type].
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG or HEIF format.
An environment supporting the HEIF format is required to play back HEIF images.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
RAW File Type
209
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
RAW File Type
Selects the file type for RAW images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [RAW File Type] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].
Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [RAW File Type], the file size of
the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.
Note
When [Uncompressed] is selected for [RAW File Type], the icon on the screen switches to (RAW). (RAW) is also
displayed while an image shot in uncompressed RAW format is played back.
Related Topic
210
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
The JPEG format has general compatibility. You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format
has high compression efficiency. The camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format.
Depending on the computer or software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible
environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by
connecting the camera and the TV via HDMI.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.
Menu item details

JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compression
efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
quality.
Hint
Depending on the setting for [JPEG/HEIF Switch], items related to the file format ([ File Format], etc.) will switch to JPEG or
HEIF.
Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.
When recording in the HEIF format with [HLG Still Image] set to [Off], the color space is recorded in sRGB. When [HLG Still
Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in BT.2020.
Related Topic
211
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the image quality when recording JPEG or HEIF images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
Related Topic
212
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details

When recording in the full frame size
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2
Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)
L: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
M: 5.1M 2768×1848 pixels
S: 3.0M 2128×1416 pixels
L: 11M 3776×2832 pixels
M: 4.6M 2464×1848 pixels
S: 2.7M 1888×1416 pixels
L: 10M 4240×2384 pixels
M: 4.3M 2768×1560 pixels
S: 2.6M 2128×1200 pixels
L: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels
213
M: 3.4M 1840×1840 pixels
S: 2.0M 1408×1408 pixels
When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size

L: 5.1M 2768×1848 pixels
M: 3.0M 2128×1416 pixels
S: 1.3M 1376×920 pixels
L: 4.6M 2464×1848 pixels
M: 2.7M 1888×1416 pixels
S: 1.1M 1232×920 pixels
L: 4.3M 2768×1560 pixels
M: 2.6M 2128×1200 pixels
S: 1.1M 1376×776 pixels
L: 3.4M 1840×1840 pixels
M: 2.0M 1408×1408 pixels
S: 0.8M 912×912 pixels
Note
The image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”
214
Related Topic
Aspect Ratio
215
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Aspect Ratio
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
1:1:
216
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
HLG Still Image
By using gamma characteristics equivalent to HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma: standard for HDR images), you can shoot still
images with a wide dynamic range and a wide color gamut compatible with BT.2020.
[HLG Still Image] can only be set when shooting in the HEIF format. Set [JPEG/HEIF Switch] to [HEIF(4:2:0)] or
[HEIF(4:2:2)], and [ File Format] to [HEIF] beforehand.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [HLG Still Image] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Shoots HLG still images.
Off:
Shoots normal still images.
Hint
You can reproduce a wider range of brightness by playing back HLG still images on an HLG-compatible TV or monitor.
You can display HLG still images on the camera’s monitor in almost the same quality as when they are displayed on an HLG-
(BT.2020-) compatible monitor by setting as follows.
[Gamma Display Assist]: [On]
[Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.]: [Auto] or [HLG(BT.2020)]
Note
In the following situations, [HLG Still Image] is fixed to [Off]:
[JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & HEIF]
When a shooting mode other than P / A / S / M is set during still image shooting
When the ISO sensitivity is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function
When the [DRO Bracket] function under [Drive Mode] is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function
When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the following functions are not available.
[D-Range Optimizer]
[ Creative Look]
[DRO Bracket] under [Drive Mode]
[ Picture Profile]
When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the available ISO range changes.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
217
218
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Color Space
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [Color Space] → desired setting.
Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
The [Color Space] setting is invalid when shooting images in the HEIF format. If [HLG Still Image] is set to [Off], images will be
recorded with the sRGB color space. If [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], images will be recorded with the BT.2020 color space.
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
HLG Still Image
219
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ File Format] → desired setting.
Menu item details
File Characteristics
Format
Records 4K movies in the XAVC HS format.

The XAVC HS format uses the HEVC codec, which has high compression efficiency. The camera can
XAVC
record movies with higher image quality than XAVC S movies but the same data volume. Long GOP
HS 4K
compression is used for movies.
XAVC
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
S 4K
XAVC
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
S HD
Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than Long
S-I 4K GOP compression.
Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than Long
S-I HD GOP compression.
Intra/Long GOP is a movie compression format. Intra compresses the movie by frame, and Long GOP compresses
multiple frames. Intra compression has better response and flexibility when editing, but Long GOP compression has
better compression efficiency.
Note
To play back XAVC HS 4K movies on a smartphone or computer, you need a device or software with high processing capability
that supports the HEVC codec.
When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].
If an APS-C size dedicated lens is attached, the edges of the screen may appear dark. When recording 4K movies with this
camera, we recommend using a lens compatible with the 35 mm full-frame format.
Related Topic
220
221
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the frame rate, bit rate, color information, etc.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate] → desired setting.
2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting] → desired setting.
Example of setting values
(A): Bit rate

(B): Color sampling
(C): Bit depth
The higher the bit rate, the higher the image quality.
Color sampling (4:2:2, 4:2:0) is the recording ratio of color information. The more uniform this ratio is, the better
the color reproducibility, and it is possible to remove colors neatly even when compositing using a green screen.
Bit depth represents the gradation of luminance information. When the bit depth is 8 bits, 256 levels of gradation
can be obtained. When the bit depth is 10 bits, 1024 levels of gradation can be obtained. A larger value enables
smoother expression from dark to bright areas.
[4:2:2 10 bit] is a setting that assumes that the recorded movie will be edited on a computer. The playback
environment for [4:2:2 10 bit] is limited.
Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K]
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
60p/50p 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
60p/50p 75M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
60p/50p 45M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 100M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 50M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
222
24p* 30M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
120p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
120p/100p 200M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
60p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
60p/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
30p/25p 140M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
30p/25p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
30p/25p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
24p* 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
120p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
120p/100p 200M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
60p/50p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
60p/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
60p/50p 25M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
30p/25p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
30p/25p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
30p/25p 16M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
24p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
24p* 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
120p/100p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
120p/100p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
223
When File Format is set to [XAVC S-I 4K]
60p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
24p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
When File Format is set to [XAVC S-I HD]
24p* 89M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
Note
In the following situations, [120p]/[100p] cannot be selected:
[Intelligent Auto]
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
224
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
S&Q Settings
You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be
recorded.
1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).
2 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired
setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual
Exposure).
3 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ S&Q Settings] → Select an item to set, and then
select the desired setting.
Menu item details

Rec Frame Rate:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Record Setting:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling, and bit depth of the movie.
The values that can be set for [ Rec Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting] are the same as the setting values
for [ Movie Settings].
The format of the recorded movie will be the same as the [ File Format] setting.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Rec Frame Rate] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
Frame Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate:
Rate 24p 30p 60p 120p
240fps 10 times slower 8 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower
120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed
225
Frame Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate:
Rate 24p 30p 60p 120p
Normal playback
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower 2 times quick
speed
Normal playback
30fps 1.25 times slower 2 times quick 4 times quick
speed
15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick 8 times quick
8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick
4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick
2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick
1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick 120 times quick
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL
Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 25p Rec Frame Rate: 50p Rec Frame Rate: 100p
200fps 8 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower
100fps 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed
50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick
25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick 4 times quick
12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick
2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick 50 times quick
1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick 100 times quick
[240fps]/[200fps] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to following items:

XAVC HS 4K
XAVC S 4K
XAVC S-I 4K
Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”
Note
In slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the actual shooting time differs from the time recorded in the movie. The recordable time
displayed toward the top of the monitor shows the remaining recording time for the movie, not the remaining recording time on
the memory card.
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[Time Code Run]
226
[Time Code Output]
Related Topic
227
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Proxy Settings
You can simultaneously record a low-bit-rate proxy movie when recording a movie or slow-motion recording/quick-motion
recording.
Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ Proxy Settings] → Select an item to set, and then
Menu item details

Proxy Recording:
Selects whether to simultaneously record proxy movies. ([On] / [Off])
Proxy File Format:
Selects the recording format of the proxy movie. ([XAVC HS HD] / [XAVC S HD])
Proxy Rec. Settings:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling and bit depth of the proxy movie. ([16M 4:2:0 10bit] / [9M 4:2:0 10bit] / [6M 4:2:0 8bit])
Selectable proxy recording settings
Proxy File Recording Recording frame Proxy Rec.

Compression codec
Format size rate Settings
16Mbps 4:2:0 10bit

MPEG-H
XAVC HS HD 1920×1080 Max. 60p/Max. 50p 9Mbps 4:2:0 10bit
HEVC/H.265
XAVC S HD 1280×720 Max. 60p/Max. 50p 6Mbps 4:2:0 8bit MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Hint
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

Normal movie recording
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p] or higher
Slow-motion recording/quick-motion recording
[ Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p] or higher

[ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] or higher
228
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
Related Topic
229
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you
select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ Shooting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.
Note
When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [ Shooting] to [Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting
results.
When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].
Related Topic
Angle of view
230
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Angle of view
The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [
Shooting] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.
Angle of view equivalent to full frame
(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies (Other than 4K 120p/ 100p)
(C) When recording movies (4K 120p/100p)
The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame when [ Shooting] is set to [Off].
Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm
(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies (Full-HD)
The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to APS-C size or Super 35mm when [ Shooting] is set to
[On]. The angle of view is approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens for both still images and movies.
However, 4K movies cannot be recorded when [ Shooting] is set to [On].
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
231
232
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates touch operations.
On: Playback Only:
Activates touch operations only during playback.
Off:
Deactivates touch operations.
Related Topic
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Sensitivity
233
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Touch Sensitivity
Sets the touch operation sensitivity.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Sensitivity] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Sensitive:
The touch responsivity is better than with [Standard].
Standard:
Sets the touch sensitivity to normal.
Hint
If you want to deactivate touch operations on the monitor, set [Touch Operation] to [Off].
Note
Even if the touch sensitivity is set to [Sensitive], the touch panel/pad may not react properly depending on the gloves used.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
234
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when
shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel
operations or touch pad operations.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Both Valid:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with
the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
235
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode

Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.
Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.
Hint
In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as
the entire screen.
236
Related Topic
Touch Panel/Pad
237
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. Select MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
This function is available when [ Focus Area] is set to one of following parameters:
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Center Fix]
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch Focus].
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
When performing auto-focusing, you can specify the position where you want to focus using touch operations. After
touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
1. Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control
wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode
The camera will focus on the touched subject.
1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus, and the
focus can be adjusted using the focus ring (spot focus). Spot focus is not available when shooting with the
viewfinder.
238
To cancel spot focus, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus mode temporarily switches to [Continuous AF]. When
the touched area is in focus, the focus mode returns to manual focus.
Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
The focusing frame for [Spot] and [Expand Spot] can be moved by dragging.
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode, the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4 or LA-EA5
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
239
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image shooting mode and movie recording
mode.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch Tracking].
2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.
Tracking will start.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
Hint
To cancel tracking, touch (Tracking release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
Related Topic
Touch Operation
240
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can configure settings related to the silent mode, which allows you to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic
sounds. You can also set whether or not to change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera
when the camera is set to the silent mode.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Silent Mode Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Silent Mode:
Sets whether or not to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds. ([On]/[Off])
When set to [On], [Shutter Type] and [Shutter Type in Interval] become locked to [Electronic Shutter], and [Audio signals]
becomes locked to [Off].
Target Function Settings:
Sets whether or not to simultaneously change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera when the
camera is set to the silent mode. ([Aperture Drive in AF]/[Auto Pixel Mapping])
If you select [Not Target], the setting values for each function will be retained even in the silent mode.
Note
Use the [Silent Mode] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of
the subject.
Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.
Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.
If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [On], shutter sounds may occasionally be heard when the power is turned off. This is not a
malfunction.
Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.
If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.
Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], you may hear shutter sounds when you register a face using [Face Memory].
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Picture Profile
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting
Related Topic
Shutter Type
Auto Pixel Mapping
241
242
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shutter Type
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Shutter Type] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Mechanical Shutter:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
Hint
In the following situations, set the [Shutter Type] to [Electronic Shutter].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy
mountains.
When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.
Note
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.
Even if [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], you may hear shutter sounds when you register a face using [Face Memory].
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Picture Profile
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting
243
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the
shutter is released.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [e-Front Curtain Shut.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].
When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set
this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.
When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In
such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].
244
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.
Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.
245
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
246
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to
moments when flickering will have less of an impact.
This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the
lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].
2 Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.
The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
Shoot the image after confirming that (flicker icon) is displayed.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
On:
Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway
down, (flicker icon) will be displayed.
Hint
The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we
recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.
You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.
You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even
when in the manual focus mode.
When [ Anti-flicker Shoot Sel.] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key Setting], you can switch the [Anti-flicker
Shoot.] function on or off by pressing the key.
Note
When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the image quality of the live view is reduced.
When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the
shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.
The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.
The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.
Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light
source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.
[Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On]
Movie shooting mode
247
The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [Anti-flicker Shoot.].
Related Topic
248
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.
When a power zoom lens is mounted:
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:
1. Optical zoom range

Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider becomes locked at the left end of the zoom
bar while the zoom position is in the optical zoom range. The magnification is displayed as “×1.0.” If [ Zoom
Range] is set to [Optical zoom only], the zoom slider will not be displayed.
2. Smart Zoom range ( )

Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [JPEG
Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).
3. Clear Image Zoom range ( )

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
4. Digital Zoom range ( )

You can magnify images using an image process.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
Hint
The default setting for the [ Zoom Range] is [Optical zoom only].
The default setting for the [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
With a power zoom lens mounted, if you enlarge an image beyond the optical zoom range, the camera will automatically switch
to Clear Image Zoom or digital zoom.
Note
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
249
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [ Frame Rate] set to [240fps]/[200fps] or [120fps]/[100fps]
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [ Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is
shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:
Tracking function
To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign [Zoom] to the desired key using [ Custom Key
Setting].
Related Topic
About zoom scale
250
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → Select [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].
2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom] → desired value.
Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired key by selecting MENU → (Setup) → [Operation
Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting].
If you assign [Zoom Operation (T)] or [Zoom Operation (W)] to the desired key in advance by selecting MENU
→ (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you can
zoom in and out simply by pressing that key.
Hint
When a power zoom lens is attached, you can use the zoom lever or zoom ring to magnify the image. If you exceed the optical
zoom magnification, you can switch to a zoom function other than the optical zoom with the same operation.
Even when you select [ Zoom] from MENU to zoom with the power zoom lens attached, the optical zoom is used up to the
telephoto end of the lens.
Note
When you select [ Zoom] from MENU to zoom with a power zoom lens attached, step zoom operations cannot be performed.
Related Topic
About zoom scale
251
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
Clear Image Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
About zoom scale
252
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned.
This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Speed] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed ] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
The [ Zoom Speed] setting is also applied when performing zoom operations from MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [
Zoom].
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Related Topic
253
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or [Ctrl w/
Smartphone]. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Speed] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
When [ Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).
If [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
254
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.
When [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Full size
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom
L: 12M - Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0×
M: 5.1M Approx. 1.5× Approx. 3.1× Approx. 6.1×
S: 3.0M Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0× Approx. 8.0×
APS-C size
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom
L: 5.1M - Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0×
M: 3.0M Approx. 1.3× Approx. 2.6× Approx. 5.2×
S: 1.3M Approx. 2.0× Approx. 4.0× Approx. 8.0×
Related Topic
255
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Zoom Ring Rotate
Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.
256
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.
For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.
2 Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.
(Charging flash icon) blinking: Charging is in progress

(Charging flash icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.
Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded.
Remove the lens hood.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)
Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When
attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.
The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.
When shooting with an external flash, light and dark stripes may appear on the image if the shutter speed is set to faster than
1/4000 seconds. If this occurs, Sony recommends shooting in the manual flash mode and setting the flash level to 1/2 or higher.
For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
257
Related Topic
Flash Mode
Wireless Flash
258
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
259
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.
Related Topic
260
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Exp.comp.set
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
Related Topic
Flash Comp.
261
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Wireless Flash
There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Wireless Flash] → [On].
2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.
3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).
You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key Setting], and then pressing that key.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.
Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Related Topic
External Flash Set.
262
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Red Eye Reduction
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.
Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.
263
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
FEL lock
The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting]→ desired button, then assign
the [FEL Lock toggle] function to the button.
2 Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.
3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.
A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.
4 Adjust the composition and shoot the image.
When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.
Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.
When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.
264
Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.
If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.
When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, (AE Lock/FEL Lock) icon lights up.
Related Topic
265
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
External Flash Set.
You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.
2 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.
3 Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.
Menu item details

Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.
Hint
If you assign [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting], you can open the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.]
screen simply by pressing that key.
You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].
You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.
Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.
Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].
[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:

When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or during movie shooting
Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.
For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/7sm3/
266
Related Topic
267
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Video Light Mode
Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.
268
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
Hint
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
If you assign [ SteadyShot Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting], you can switch the [ SteadyShot]
function on or off by pressing the key.
When shooting in a dark place, the (SteadyShot) icon may blink. We recommend that you set a faster shutter speed by
decreasing the aperture value or adjusting the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
269
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
Note
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change. When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active], the angle
of view becomes narrower. When the focal length is 200 mm or more, we recommend setting [ SteadyShot] to [Standard].
In the following situations, [Active] cannot be selected:

When [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p] or higher
Related Topic
270
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [ Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)
Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera
towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.
When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The current set value of the
SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of (SteadyShot) icon.
When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [ SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.
Related Topic
271
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the focal length information to be used for the built-in SteadyShot function when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to
[Manual].
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ Focal Length] → desired setting.
Menu item details

8mm - 1000mm:
The SteadyShot function uses the focal length that you set.
Check the focal-length index on the lens and set the focal-length.
Related Topic
272
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [ Lens Compensation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.
Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.
Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].
If [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active] in the movie recording mode, [Distortion Comp.] will become locked to [Auto].
273
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Long Exposure NR
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].
[Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
274
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
High ISO NR
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality] → [High ISO NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
[High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].
275
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Auto Review] → desired setting.
Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Related Topic
276
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to display an indicator of the remaining number of still images that can be continuously shot at the
same shooting speed.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Remain Shoot Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Always Display:
Always displays the indicator when shooting still images.
Shoot-Only Display:
During shooting, the remaining number of images that can be shot is always displayed. When you press the shutter
button halfway down, the remaining number of images is displayed.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the indicator.
Hint
When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will
decrease.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
277
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not during shooting. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of
images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the grid line.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
Hint
If you assign [Grid Line Display Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you can
show or hide the grid lines by pressing the assigned key.
Related Topic
278
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the displayed type of grid line. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Type] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Hint
If you assign [ Grid Line Type] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you can switch
the type of grid line each time you press the assigned key.
Related Topic
279
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [ Creative
Look], etc. on the screen.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Live View Display Set.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Live View Display:
Sets whether to reflect all the shooting settings on the monitor and display the Live View in conditions close to what your
picture will look like once the settings are applied, or to display the Live View without reflecting the settings. ([Setting
Effect ON] / [Setting Effect OFF])
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], you can easily check the composition even when shooting with the image composition
on the Live View display.
Exposure Effect:
Sets whether or not to display the Live View with automatic correction by reflecting the exposure from the flash when
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect ON]. ([Exposure Set. & flash] / [Exposure Setting Only])
When using the flash for shooting a portrait, select [Exposure Setting Only] to manually set the exposure based on the
ambient lighting.
Frame Rate Low Limit:
Sets whether or not to keep the frame rate of the Live View from becoming too slow. ([On] / [Off])
If you select [On], the frame rate of the Live View will not become slow even when shooting in a dark place, but the Live
View display may become dark.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Note
[Exposure Effect] is effective only when using a flash manufactured by Sony.
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Movie]
[S&Q Motion]
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
280
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Aperture Preview
While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] → set the [Aperture Preview]
function to the desired key.
2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was assigned.
Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.
Related Topic
281
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] → set the [Shot. Result
Preview] function to the desired key.
2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was assigned.
Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.
Related Topic
Aperture Preview
282
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bright Monitoring
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] → assign the [Bright
Monitoring] function to the desired key.
2 Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an image.
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.
Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [Auto Magnifier in MF] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.
During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the
measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.
Related Topic
283
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Emph disp dur REC
Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Emph disp dur REC] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].
284
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Marker Display
While shooting movies, you can set whether or not to display markers on the monitor or the viewfinder, and select the
types of marker.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
Menu item details

Marker Display:
Sets whether or not to display markers. ([On] / [Off])
Center Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the middle of the shooting screen. ([Off] / [On])
Aspect Marker:
Sets the aspect marker display. ([Off] / [4:3] / [13:9] / [14:9] / [15:9] / [1.66:1] / [1.85:1] / [2.35:1])
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. ([Off] /
[80%] / [90%])
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
([Off] / [On])
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Position the subject at the cross point of [Guideframe] to ensure a balanced composition.
Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or when shooting movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
285
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Images with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed
in low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Display Assist]
function to reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Display Assist] can also be
applied when playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Display Assist] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Uses the gamma display assist function.
Off:
Does not use the gamma display assist function.
Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Sel.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting], [ Custom Key Setting], or [
Custom Key Setting], you can turn the gamma display assist function on or off by pressing the assigned key.
Note
[Gamma Display Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
Related Topic
HLG Still Image
286
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the conversion type for [Gamma Display Assist].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Displays images with effects as follows according to the gamma or color mode set in [ Picture Profile].
When the gamma is set to [S-Log2]: [S-Log2→709(800%)]
When the gamma is set to [S-Log3]: [S-Log3→709(800%)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [BT.2020]:
[HLG(BT.2020)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [709]: [HLG(709)]
Displays images with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when shooting HLG still images with [HLG Still Image] set to [On].
Displays images with an [S-Log3→709(800%)] effect when outputting RAW movies to another device connected via
HDMI during movie shooting.
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays images with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays images with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when images are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when images are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting], you can
switch the [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] setting each time you press the assigned key.
Note
When [Gamma Display Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, an effect is applied to the image as follows:
When playing back a movie recorded with [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)] or
[HLG(709)] effect depending on the color mode.
When playing back an HLG still image shot with [HLG Still Image] set to [On]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)]
effect.
When playing back a RAW movie output to another device connected via HDMI: Displays the image with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect.
In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [ Picture Profile].
287
Related Topic
288
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
Related Topic
Audio Rec Level
289
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Rec Level].
2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.
To reset the audio recording level to the default setting, press the (Delete) button.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.
290
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio
during HDMI output.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.
291
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
292
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Shoe Audio Set.
Sets the digital audio transmitted from a microphone (sold separately) attached to the multi-interface shoe of the camera.
Use a microphone that supports the digital audio interface. You can set the sampling frequency, the number of
quantization bits, and the number of channels.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [ Shoe Audio Set.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 4.
:
channels to 2.
:
channels to 2.
Hint
The audio level display on the monitor is for 4 channels during 4-channel audio recording.
Note
When an external microphone (sold separately) is connected to the (microphone) terminal of the camera, the audio is
recorded from the external microphone attached to the (microphone) terminal. You cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].
If the attached microphone is set to analog transmission, you cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].
When the attached microphone does not support 4-channel audio recording, you cannot select [ ] (48khz/24bit
4ch).
When the attached microphone does not support 24-bit audio recording, [ Shoe Audio Set.] becomes locked to [
] (48khz/16bit 2ch).
Audio cannot be recorded correctly in the following situations during movie recording:
When you attach or remove the microphone
When digital transmission is switched to analog transmission or vice versa on the microphone side
Related Topic
293
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
294
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
TC/UB
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
Menu item details

Time Code Preset:
Sets the time code.
User Bit Preset:
Sets the user bit.
Time Code Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
Time Code Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
Time Code Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
User Bit Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (Time Code Preset)
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
How to reset the time code
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).
How to set the user bit (User Bit Preset)
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
How to reset the user bit
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).
295
How to select the recording method for the time code (Time Code Format *1)
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (Time Code Run)
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (Time Code Make)
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in the [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [Time Code
Run] setting.
The time code read differs as follows, depending on the [Recording Mode] setting in [ Rec. Media Settings].
When [Recording Mode] is set to [Simult. ( )] or [Simult. ( / )], the time code is read from the memory card
in the slot 1.
When [Recording Mode] is set to the following, the time code is read from the memory card to which movies will be
recorded.
[Standard]
[Simult. ( )]
[Sort(RAW/JPEG)]
[Sort (RAW/HEIF)]
[Sort (HEIF/RAW)]
[Sort( / )]
Related Topic
296
TC/UB Disp. Setting
297
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Sets the display of the recording time counter, time code (TC), and user bit (UB) for movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [TC/UB Disp. Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Counter:
Displays the time counter of movie recording.
TC:
Displays the time code.
U-Bit:
Displays the user bit.
Related Topic
TC/UB
298
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Customizing the camera”). From each item
name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Registering and recalling camera settings

Camera Set. Memory
Memory/Recall Media
Registering frequently used functions to the function menu

Fn Menu Settings
Registering frequently used functions to My Menu

Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Dial Setup
Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Recording movies by pressing the shutter button

Monitor/viewfinder settings
299
300
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.
To assign frequently used functions to buttons ( Custom Key Setting/ Custom Key Setting/
Custom Key Setting)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the Custom Buttons (C1 to C4) according to your preferences. It is
recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the assigned
functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.
To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)

If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered
functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the
function you want to use by selecting the icons.
To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)

If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting and network menu on the “My Menu” screen,
you can quickly access the desired menu items.
301
To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial ( My Dial Settings )
You can assign the desired functions to the front/rear dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings to the camera as “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.
Example: [My Dial Settings] screen for models with a front/rear dial
To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( Camera Set. Memory)
You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings
easily by using the mode dial, etc.
* You cannot register custom key settings.
To save the customized camera settings to a memory card (Save/Load Settings)

You can save camera settings* to a memory card using [Save/Load Settings]. This function is useful when you want to
back up the settings, or to import the settings to another camera of the same model, etc.
* Some settings cannot be saved on a memory card.
Related Topic
Add Item
Camera Set. Memory
Save/Load Settings
302
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode, movie shooting mode, and
playback mode.
Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
1. AF-ON Button
2. Custom Button 1
3. Custom Button 3
4. Custom Button 2
5. MOVIE Button
6. AEL Button
7. Center Button
8. Control Wheel/Left Button/Right Button/Down Button
9. Custom Button 4
10. Multi-Slc Center Btn
11. Fn/ Button
For details on custom key settings, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7sm3/l/custom.php
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the AEL button.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key Setting]. If you want to
assign a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key Setting].
2 Move to the [Rear1] screen using the top/bottom side of the control wheel. Then, select [AEL Button] and
press the center of the control wheel.
303
3 Select [Eye AF] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
If you press the AEL button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and
the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the AEL button.
Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.
Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings
304
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations
of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.
Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through
[My Dial 3].
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.
Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting] → Select
the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”
Menu item details
My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.
Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the
C1 (Custom 1) button.
305
Operation part My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3
Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set
Front dial Av Creative Look Move AF Frame : Std
Rear dial Tv Exposure Comp. Move AF Frame : Std
1. Press the C1 (Custom1) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
The icons for the functions registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.
2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set
the shutter speed.
3. Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial,
and the rear dial.
4. Turn the control wheel to set [ White Balance], turn the front dial to set [ Creative Look], and turn the rear dial
to set [ Exposure Comp.].
5. Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].
Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.
Related Topic
306
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Camera Set. Memory
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.
1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.
2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.
3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has been selected using [ Memory/Recall Media]
can be used.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
Memory/Recall Media
307
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling your preferred shooting settings registered with [ Camera Set. Memory].
1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 ( Recall Camera Setting).
2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [
Recall Camera Setting].
Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3 ( Recall Camera Setting), then select the
desired number by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.
If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled from the memory card in the slot specified in [
Memory/Recall Media]. You can confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [
Memory/Recall Media].
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [ Recall Camera Setting] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
Memory/Recall Media
308
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Memory/Recall Media
Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Memory/Recall Media] → desired slot.
Menu item details

Slot 1:
Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects the slot 2.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
309
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and
temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and
release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number
from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.
2 Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you
want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.
A (check) mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.
3 Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and
press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you
chose.
4 Select [Register].
Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Exposure
Focus setting
Drive mode (other than self-timer)
To recall registered settings

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key Setting] → Select the desired key and then
select one of the registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
2. On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.
Hint
You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using
[ Custom Key Setting].
Note
The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is
set to P/A/S/M.
310
Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered
settings may not take effect.
Related Topic
311
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Fn Menu Settings
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode.
You can register 12 functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [ Grid Line Display].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → select [Fn Menu Settings].
2 Select (Drive Mode) from among the 12 still image function menu items using the
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
3 Move to the screen showing [ Grid Line Display] using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then,
select [ Grid Line Display] and press the center of the control wheel.
( Grid Line Display) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the Function
menu.
Related Topic
312
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Add Item].
2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Hint
You can add up to 42 items to (My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
313
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Sort Item].
2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
Related Topic
Add Item
314
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Item].
2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
315
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].
2 Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
Related Topic
Delete All
Add Item
316
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Delete All
You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].
2 Select [OK].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Add Item
317
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
318
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate
settings.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → Select [Different Set for Still/Mv].
The operation guide screen will appear. Select [OK] to display the setting screen.
2 Add check marks to the items that you want to set separately for still image shooting and movie recording,
and then select [OK].
You can set the following items separately for still image shooting and movie recording.
Aperture
Shutter Speed
ISO
Exposure Comp.
Metering Mode
White Balance
Picture Profile
Focus Mode
Hint
When you switch from a common setting to separate settings with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the current settings are applied to
both still image shooting and movie recording. However, the custom white balance setting is only applied to still image shooting.
When you switch from separate settings to a common setting with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the setting values of items return to
their initial values. As an exception, the setting values for still image shooting are applied to the aperture value, shutter speed,
and custom white balance settings.
Note
Even if you add a check mark to [Exposure Comp.], the exposure compensation value will be simultaneously changed for both
still image shooting and movie recording when you change the exposure compensation value with the exposure compensation
dial.
319
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Dial Setup
When the shooting mode is set to “M”, you can switch the functions of the front/rear dial.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Dial Setup] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Tv Av:
The front dial is used to change the shutter speed and the rear dial to change the aperture value.
Av Tv:
The front dial is used to change the aperture value and the rear dial to change the shutter speed.
320
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter
speed.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.
321
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Function Ring(Lens)
You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with
compatible lenses).
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.
Menu item details

Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.
Related Topic
322
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can set whether the multi-selector, dials, and wheel can be locked by pressing and holding down the Fn (Function)
button.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Lock Operation Parts] → desired setting.
To lock the operating parts, hold down the Fn (Function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the
monitor.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not lock the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, or control wheel even if you press and hold down the Fn (Function)
button.
Multi-Selector Only:
Locks the multi-selector.
Dial + Wheel:
Locks the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.
All:
Locks the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
Note
If you set [AF Area Registration] to [On], [Lock Operation Parts] will be fixed to [Off].
Related Topic
323
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the
MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ REC w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [REC Control].
Note
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
324
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Select Finder/Monitor] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
VF(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.
Hint
You can assign the [Select Finder/Monitor] function to your preferred key.
[ Custom Key Setting], [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Custom Key Setting] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the preferred
key.
If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [Select Finder/Monitor] to [VF(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)]
beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor] and add a check mark to [Monitor Off]
beforehand.
Note
Depending on whether the monitor is open or closed and the angle of the monitor, the eye sensor of the camera may not detect
your eye approaching even if [Select Finder/Monitor] is set to [Auto].
Related Topic
325
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor] or [Finder] →
desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with (check) are available.
Menu item details

Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.
Monitor Off*:
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
326
Related Topic
327
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Viewing”). From each item name, you can
jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Viewing images
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
Changing how images are displayed

Display as Group
Setting how to jump between images

Image Jump Method
Adding information to images

Rating
Extracting still images from a movie

Photo Capture
Deleting images
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
328
329
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects a slot that contains a memory card.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Select Playback Media] → desired slot.
Menu item details

Slot 1:
Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects the slot 2.
Note
When you select [Date View] in [View Mode], the camera only plays back images from a memory card selected using [Select
Playback Media].
Related Topic
330
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Plays back the recorded images.
1 Select MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Select Playback Media] to choose which the
memory card slot to play back.
2 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
3 Select the image with the control wheel.
Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images
in the group, press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].
If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.
When [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focus frame at the time of shooting is displayed over played-back images.
The focus frame that the camera used to focus during shooting is displayed in green. Even if multiple focus frames are displayed
during shooting, only the one on which the camera actually tried to focus will be displayed during playback.
Related Topic
Display as Group
331
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the (Enlarge Image) button.
Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or
next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) →
[Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
You can also enlarge the image by touching the monitor. Drag the monitor to move the enlarged position. Set [Touch Operation]
to [On] beforehand.
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
332
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after the enlarged display
screen is closed.
Related Topic
333
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
334
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the camera detects the vertical and horizontal directions, and displays the image being
played back according to the orientation.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.
Related Topic
335
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
1 Select the slot of the memory card to be played back from MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] →
[Select Playback Media].
2 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.
3 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.
Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel
Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.
Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.
Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera.
Related Topic
336
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
337
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the audio to be monitored by the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera when you record
movie audio in 4 channels or when playing back a movie recorded in 4 channels.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] → desired setting.
Menu item details

CH1/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
CH3/CH4:
Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
CH1+3/CH2+4:
Outputs the mixed audio of channel 1 and channel 3 to the L (left) side and the mixed audio of channel 2 and channel 4
to the R (right) side.
CH1/CH1:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
CH2/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 2 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
Note
The [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] settings are enabled when an accessory for 4-channel audio recording is attached to the Multi
Interface Shoe of the camera during movie recording.
The camera cannot output audio in 4 channels to the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera.
When outputting audio through the speakers of the camera, the channels will also change depending on the [ 4ch Audio
Monitoring] setting.
Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
338
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Automatically plays back images continuously.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
2 Select [Enter].
Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].
339
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Cont. Play for Interval].
2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
340
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. Play for Interval].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during [Cont. Play for Interval].
Related Topic
341
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being played back.
2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
Related Topic
342
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [View Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
Movie View:
Displays only movies by date.
343
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
To play back the images in a group, select the group and press the center of the control wheel.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
On the image index screen, (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.
Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
344
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to display a focus frame around the area where the camera focused when you play back a still
image.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Focus Frame Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Off:
Does not display a focus frame during playback.
On:
Displays a focus frame in green during playback.
Hint
Even if multiple focus frames are displayed at the time of shooting, only the one indicating where the camera actually focused will
be displayed during playback.
Even if a focus frame is displayed around the face of the subject at the time of shooting, the focus frame will be displayed around
the eye during playback when an eye is detected.
Note
A focus frame will not be displayed over the following images.
Still images shot with manual focus
Movies
Still images created with [Photo Capture]
The focus frame is displayed only on the single-image playback screen. The focus frame is not displayed on the image index
screen or over enlarged images.
The focus frame is not displayed during auto reviewing.
If you shoot an image with a different composition after performing auto-focusing, the focus frame will appear offset from the
subject.
Even if the focus frame is displayed, it may not be in focus to the subject.
Even if you turn off the focusing frame display while shooting using the [AF Area Auto Clear] or [AF-C Area Display] function,
when [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focusing frame will be displayed during playback.
345
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can jump between images during playback. This function is useful when you want to find one of many recorded
images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating. Assign this function to either
the front dial or rear dial.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Select Image Jump Dial] → desired item.
Menu item details

Front dial:
Use the front dial to jump between images.
Rear dial:
Use the rear dial to jump between images.
Related Topic
Image Jump Method
346
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Image Jump Method
Sets the method for jumping between images during playback by operating a dial.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Jump Method] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

One by one:
Plays back images one by one.
By 10 images:
Jumps in units of 10 images.
By 100 images:
Jumps in units of 100 images.
Protect Only:
Plays back only protected images.
Rating Only:
Plays back all rated images.
Rating Only ( ) - Rating Only ( ):
Plays back only images for which a rating ( to ) has been specified.
W/O Rating Only:
Plays back only images that are not rated.
Note
When [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], one group is counted as one image.
When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], you can jump
between images only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When [View Mode] is set to a parameter other than [Date View],
images will be played back one by one even if you use the dial assigned using [Select Image Jump Dial].
When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], movies are
always skipped during jumping playback.
Related Topic
Rating
347
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (protect) mark is displayed on protected images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Protect] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key
Setting], you can protect images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key. The [Protect] function is assigned to the C3
button in the default settings.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
348
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find images.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
3 Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key Setting] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a
rating. The level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
By specifying ratings with the [Image Jump Method] function, you can quickly find the desired image.
Related Topic
Image Jump Method
349
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the available number of (rating) when rating (ranking) images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating]
using [ Custom Key Setting].
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
2 Add a (check) mark to the number of (rating) that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
Related Topic
Rating
350
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Rotate].
2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.
351
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
2 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Photo Capture].
3 Play back the movie and pause it.
4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
Hint
With [ JPEG/HEIF Switch], you can select either JPEG or HEIF as the recording file format for still images.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
352
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) for still images captured with [Photo Capture].
You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency. The
camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format. Depending on the computer or
software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play
back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the camera and the TV via
HDMI.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.
Menu item details

JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compression
efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:0):
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
quality.
Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.
Related Topic
Photo Capture
353
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select Playback Media] to a memory card in
another slot.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Copy].
All of the contents with a date or in a folder currently being played back will be copied to a memory card in another
slot.
Hint
You can select the type of images to be displayed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [View Mode].
Note
If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a group on the destination memory card.
If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the destination memory card.
It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
To copy a movie, the destination memory card must support the recording format of the movie. If the movie cannot be copied, a
message will be displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Related Topic
354
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete] → desired setting.
Menu item details

All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
Related Topic
Display as Group
Format
355
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
356
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and a TV equipped with an HDMI
jack are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.
1 Turn off both this product and the TV.
2 Connect the HDMI terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately).
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI Type-A terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.
3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.
4 Turn on this product.
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.
5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.
“BRAVIA” Sync
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate
this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.
1. After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output]
→ [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
2. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.
357
If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to
another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [CTRL
FOR HDMI] → [Off].
Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. When you connect a Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible device using an
HDMI cable (sold separately) or the USB cable, the TV becomes set to an image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a
whole new world of photos can be enjoyed in breathtakingly high quality.
The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle textures and colors.
Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set
[Time Code Output] to [Off].
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution]
→ [2160p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.
358
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [Format] → desired memory card slot.
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
Related Topic
359
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings
and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Prioritize Rec. Media] → desired slot.
Menu item details

Slot 1:
Selects media in the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects media in the slot 2.
Hint
To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the
image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].
Related Topic
360
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory
cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Recording Mode] → desired setting.
List of storage locations by recording mode
Recording Mode Memory card slot selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media] Another memory card slot
Standard still image/movie
Simult. ( ) still image/movie still image
Simult. ( ) still image/movie movie
Simult. ( / ) still image/movie still image/movie
Sort(RAW/JPEG) still image (RAW)/movie still image (JPEG)
Sort (RAW/HEIF) still image (RAW)/movie still image (HEIF)
Sort(JPEG/RAW) still image (JPEG)/movie still image (RAW)
Sort (HEIF/RAW) still image (HEIF)/movie still image (RAW)
Sort( / ) still image movie
Related Topic
361
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to
the other memory card.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Auto Switch Media] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you
have forgotten to insert a memory card.
Off:
The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media].
How the camera switches the memory card slot in use

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard]:
When images cannot be recorded to the memory card in use, [Prioritize Rec. Media] switches automatically and images
are recorded to the other memory card.
When the other memory card becomes full after switching, the camera starts recording in the former slot again.
Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]
: Recording images
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): The memory card is replaced with a recordable one.
When recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards:
Recording still images with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. ( )]

Recording movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. ( )]
Recording still images or movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. ( / )]
The camera stops simultaneous recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the
memory card that has become full, the camera starts recording to the other memory card.
When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts
simultaneous recording with the selected setting again.
362
([Recording Mode]: [Simult. ( / )])
: Simultaneous recording is available.

: Recording is disabled.
: The same image cannot be recorded simultaneously.
(B): The memory card is removed.
(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.
Images that are not recorded simultaneously (for example: still images during [Simult. ( )]) continue to be
recorded to the other memory card when the memory card in use becomes full.
When the memory card in use becomes full while recording a movie, the movie continues to be recorded to the other
memory card until the recording in progress is finished.
When recording images separately to two memory cards in the RAW and JPEG/HEIF formats:
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF], and [Recording Mode] is set to the following:
[Sort(RAW/JPEG)]
[Sort (RAW/HEIF)]
[Sort(JPEG/RAW)]
[Sort (HEIF/RAW)]
The camera stops recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the memory card that
has become full, the camera starts recording both in the RAW and JPEG/HEIF formats to the other memory card.
When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording
the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

([Recording Mode]: [Sort(RAW/JPEG)])
: Images are sorted by the file format.

: Recording still images is disabled (movies can be recorded).
363
: Images cannot be sorted.
When the memory card in use becomes full while recording movies, the camera starts recording to the other memory
card.
When recording still images and movies separately to two memory cards:
When [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort( / )]
When either of the memory cards becomes full, both still images and movies are recorded to the other memory card.
When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording
the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

([Recording Mode]: [Sort( / )])
: Images are sorted by the image type.

: Images cannot be sorted.
Hint
Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches
the slot using [Auto Switch Media], replace the memory card in the former slot with a recordable memory card.
If [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], the setting for [Prioritize Rec. Media] will switch automatically when the slot switches. If
you want to record on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot again using [Prioritize Rec. Media].
If you want to continually record with the settings selected with [Recording Mode] and [Prioritize Rec. Media], set [Auto Switch
Media] to [Off].
Related Topic
364
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Select REC Folder
If [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Select REC Folder] → desired folder.
Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].
If [Recording Mode] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], you may only select the common folder on
the both memory cards. If there is no common folder, you can make one using [Create New Folder].
Related Topic
Create New Folder
365
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be
automatically created.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Create New Folder].
Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
If [Recording Mode] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], a new folder is created with a folder number
one greater than the largest folder number currently used on both memory cards inserted in the memory card slots.
If [Recording Mode] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard] and an image is shot, a new folder may be
Related Topic
366
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [ Recover
Image DB].
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [ Recover Image DB].
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB] → desired memory card slot → [Enter].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
367
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Display Media Info. (still image/movie)
Displays the recordable number of still images and the remaining recording time for movies on the memory card.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Display Media Info.] → desired memory card slot.
368
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Configure settings related to the folder and file name of the still image to be shot.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10000405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2020)
Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
Related Topic
Create New Folder
File Settings
369
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
File Settings
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.
Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
Related Topic
370
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
IPTC Information
You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata
Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.
* IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:
Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], the (IPTC) icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Register IPTC Info :

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera. Select [Slot 1] or [Slot 2] as the memory card from which
to read out IPTC information.
Hint
When you play back images that have IPTC information, the (IPTC) icon appears on the screen.
For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/
Note
Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.
You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.
To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.
Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.
Related Topic
Setting Reset
371
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Copyright Info
Writes copyright information onto the still images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.
2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter
up to 46 letters.
Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.
Note
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.
Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].
Related Topic
Using the keyboard
372
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Write Serial Number
Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.
1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Write Serial Number] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data for the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera’s serial number to the Exif data for the image.
373
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Always Connected:
Selects the connection method between the camera and a smartphone. ([On]/[Off])
If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to a smartphone, you do not need to perform the connection
procedure on the camera subsequent times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a smartphone only when the
connection procedure is performed.
Note
If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].
Related Topic
Send to Smartphone
374
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the instruction manual
for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.
1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.
2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing] to display the screen for pairing.
3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
The following functions cannot be used when [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Linking location information with a smartphone
Infrared remote commander
Power-saving mode
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
375
Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings
Reset Network Set.
376
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
WPS Push
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or
contact the administrator of the access point.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [WPS Push].
2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
Access Point Set.
377
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Access Point Set.].
2 Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
3 Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without (Key mark) do not require a password.
4 Select [OK].
Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
378
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
Related Topic
WPS Push
Using the keyboard
379
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz]. The [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] setting applies to smartphone transfers, remote operations using a
smartphone, and the PC remote function via Wi-Fi Direct connection.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] → desired setting.
Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz
Note
If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.
380
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Display Wi-Fi Info.
Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].
Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed under the following conditions.
[FTP Function] under [FTP Transfer Func.] is set to [On], and a Wi-Fi connection has been established.
[PC Remote] is set to [On] and [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point] under [PC Remote Function], and a
Wi-Fi connection has been established.
To display the QR Code for the MAC address

You can import the MAC address of this camera to a smartphone. Use one of the following methods to display the QR Code on
the screen, and read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on smartphone application.
When the camera is turned off, turn the camera on while pressing the (Playback) button.
Press the (Delete) button on the [Display Wi-Fi Info.] screen.
For details on how to read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on, refer to the following support page.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/transfer/l/macaddress/index.php
The Transfer & Tagging add-on is only available in certain countries and regions.
381
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
SSID/PW Reset
This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when connecting to a
smartphone or establishing a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a computer. If you want to change which devices have
permission to connect, reset the connection information.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.
Related Topic
Send to Smartphone
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
382
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “ Location
Information .”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “ Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl .”
1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
Menu item details

Bluetooth Function:
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera. (On/Off)
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
383
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Configures a wired LAN. You can connect this product to a network via wired LAN by connecting a commercially
available USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the USB Type-C terminal on the product.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Wired LAN] → desired setting.
Menu item details

IP Address Setting:
Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually. ([Auto]/[Manual])
Display Wired LAN Info.:
Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [ IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Hint
We recommend that you use a gigabit ethernet adaptor for USB Type-C connections.
To display the QR Code for the MAC address

You can import the MAC address of this camera to a smartphone. Use one of the following methods to display the QR Code on
the screen, and read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on smartphone application.
When the camera is turned off, turn the camera on while pressing the (Playback) button.
Press the (Delete) button on the [Display Wired LAN Info.] screen.
For details on how to read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on, refer to the following support page.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/transfer/l/macaddress/index.php
The Transfer & Tagging add-on is only available in certain countries and regions.
Note
Not all types of USB-LAN conversion adaptors are guaranteed to operate properly.
Related Topic
Using the keyboard
384
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
385
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Edit Device Name].
2 Select the input box, then input the device name → [OK].
Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Using the keyboard
386
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications
during FTP transfer.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2010/h_zz/
1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Import Root Certificate].
387
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Security(IPsec)
Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a wired LAN or Wi-Fi connection.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details

IPsec:
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used. ([On]/[Off])
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].
For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.
On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.
Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.
For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.
Related Topic
Using the keyboard
388
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Reset Network Set.
Resets all the network settings to default settings.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].
389
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
FTP Transfer Func.
You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP
servers is required.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
1 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.
Related Topic
390
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
391
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Viewfinder Bright.
When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.
392
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Finder Color Temp.
Adjusts the color temperature of the viewfinder.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.
393
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Viewfinder Magnifi.
Sets the display magnification of the viewfinder. If you select [Zoom Out], the viewing angle will become narrower. You
can easily check the overall composition even when wearing glasses.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Viewfinder Magnifi.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the viewfinder display magnification to standard.
Zoom Out:
Reduces the viewfinder display magnification.
394
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Finder Frame Rate (still image)
Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.
This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.
This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [ Custom Key Setting].
Menu item details

Standard:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
High:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.
Even when [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the
temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.
[ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:

During playback
During HDMI connection
When the temperature inside the camera’s body is high
Related Topic
395
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Power Save Start Time
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.
The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
During FTP transfer
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
While [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On]
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
396
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 120 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 90 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 90 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 60 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (60p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
Related Topic
397
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
398
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
USB Connection
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off]
beforehand.
Also, when you set MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct
Method] to [USB], set [PC Remote] under [PC Remote Function] to [Off].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
399
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
400
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images Available
Playing back images Available
Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections Available
Charging a battery pack Unavailable
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
This product cannot be powered via the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal.
401
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
HDMI Resolution
When you connect the camera to a TV or monitor device using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select the
resolution to be output from the HDMI terminal of the camera during still image shooting or playback.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically recognizes the resolution of the connected TV or output device and sets the output resolution
accordingly.
2160p:
Outputs signals in 2160p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select [1080i], [1080p], or [2160p] based on the connected TV.
402
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets the video and audio to be output to an external recorder/player connected via HDMI when shooting a movie.
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable (sold separately) to output 4K movies or RAW movies.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Output Settings] → desired setting item.
Menu item details

Rec. Media dur HDMI Output:
Sets whether or not to record movies on the memory card of the camera during HDMI output.
[On]: Records movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs the movies to the HDMI-connected device at the
same time. The color depth for the output movie is based on [Record Setting] under [ Movie Settings].
[Off(HDMI Only)]: Does not record movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs movies only to devices
connected via HDMI.
Output Resolution:
Sets the resolution of the image that will be output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur HDMI
Output] is set to [On] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([Auto] / [2160p] / [1080p] / [1080i])
4K Output Set.(HDMI Only):
Sets the frame rate and color depth of 4K movie output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur
HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([60p 10bit] / [50p 10bit] / [30p 10bit] / [25p
10bit] / [24p 10bit])
RAW Output:
Sets whether or not to output RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
RAW Output Setting:
Sets the frame rate when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([60p] / [50p]
/ [30p] / [25p] / [24p])
Color Gamut for RAW Output:
Sets the color gamut when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([
]/[ ])
Time Code Output:
Sets whether or not to output the time code and user bit to another device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
Time code information is transmitted as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can
then refer to the digital data in order to recognize the time data.
REC Control:
Sets whether to start or stop recording on the external recorder/player remotely by operating the camera when the
camera is connected to an external recorder/player. ([On] / [Off])
4ch Audio Output:
When recording audio in 4 channels, set the combination of audio channels that will be output to other devices
connected via HDMI.
[CH1/CH2]: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
[CH3/CH4]: Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
Hint
With [REC Control] set to [On], (STBY) is displayed when a recording command is ready to be sent to the external
recorder/player, and (REC) is displayed when a recording command is being sent to the external recorder/player.
Even when playing back a movie with 4 channels on a device connected to the HDMI terminal of the camera, the audio is output
with the [4ch Audio Output] setting.
403
Note
RAW movies cannot be recorded on the memory card of the camera.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is locked to [On] and [RAW Output] is locked to [Off]. It
is not possible to only output 4K movies to a device connected via HDMI without recording the movies on a memory card. It is
also not possible to output RAW movies.
When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] or the camera outputs RAW movies, [HDMI Info. Display]
becomes temporarily set to [Off].
When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], the counter does not move forward (the actual recording time is
not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recorder/player.
[REC Control] can be used with external recorders/players that support the [REC Control] function.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [Off], you cannot set [REC Control].
Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], images may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In this case, set [Time
Code Output] to [Off].
It is not possible to output audio in 4 channels to other devices connected via HDMI.
The gamma is locked to S-Log3 during RAW output. You can reproduce contrast equivalent to that of the normal gamma by
setting [Gamma Display Assist] to [On] and [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to [Auto] or [S-Log3→709(800%)].
404
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether or not to display shooting information on a TV or a monitor device when the camera and TV, etc. are
connected via an HDMI cable (sold separately).
1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the
camera’s monitor.
405
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, set [CTRL FOR HDMI] to [Off].
406
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [ Language] → desired language.
407
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can set the area (where you are using the camera), daylight savings ([On]/[Off]), the date display format, and the
date and time.
The Area/Date/Time Setting screen is displayed automatically when you turn on the product for the first time or when the
internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first
time.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [Area/Date/Time Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Area Setting:
Sets the area where you are using the camera.
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On] / [Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
Related Topic
408
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
Note
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
409
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Hint
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], [Audio signals] becomes locked to [Off].
Note
If [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
410
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
IR Remote Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Infrared Remote Commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Refer also to the operating instructions for the Infrared Remote Commander.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [IR Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Allows infrared remote commander operation.
Off:
Does not allow infrared remote commander operation.
Note
The lens or lens hood may block the infrared remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the infrared remote commander in the
position from which the signal can reach the product.
When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after using an infrared remote
commander.
An infrared remote commander cannot be used while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
411
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Auto Pixel Mapping
Sets whether or not to automatically optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). Normally, set this function to [On].
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Auto Pixel Mapping] → desired setting.
Menu item details

On:
Performs pixel mapping automatically at regular intervals when you turn off the camera.
During this time, shutter sounds will be produced.
Off:
Does not perform pixel mapping automatically.
Hint
If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel Mapping] regularly. We recommend that you perform the operation once
every three days.
Note
If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.
Related Topic
Pixel Mapping
412
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Pixel Mapping
You can manually optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel
Mapping] regularly according to the following procedure. We recommend that you perform the operation once every
three days.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → select [Pixel Mapping].
2 Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Pixel mapping will be performed.
The camera cannot be operated during pixel mapping.

The camera will restart when pixel mapping is complete.
Hint
If you see bright spots in a recorded image on the camera monitor, immediately perform [Pixel Mapping].
Note
Pixel mapping cannot be performed when the battery is low.
Related Topic
Auto Pixel Mapping
413
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Version].
Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged
battery pack.
414
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Save/Load Settings
You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same
model.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.
Menu item details

Load:
Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.
Save:
Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.
Delete:
Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.
Settings that cannot be saved

The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting
parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)
(Shooting)
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
(Exposure/Color)
External Flash Set.
White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3
(Focus)
Face Memory
(Network)
FTP Transfer Func.*
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band
IP Address Setting
Edit Device Name
Import Root Certificate
Security(IPsec)
* You can save or load settings under [FTP Transfer Func.] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [FTP Transfer Func.] →
[Save/Load FTP Settings]. For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
(Setup)
Note
415
You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].
Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.
Only Slot 1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/loading destination slot.
You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.
You can use this function to save settings registered to [ Camera Set. Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is
unavailable when the mode dial is set to 1/2/3 ( Recall Camera Setting). Set the mode dial to a position other than 1/2/3
before using this function.
416
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings. The setting values for both still image shooting and movie
recording are initialized.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
Settings of [ Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
The check mark for [Picture Profile] in [Different Set for Still/Mv] is not reset when you perform either [Camera Settings Reset] or
[Initialize].
Related Topic
417
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using the smartphone application Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone.
Download and install the application Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge
Mobile is already installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.
418
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can connect your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code. You can connect to the camera with the same
operation on any Android smartphone, iPhone, or iPad.
To connect the camera and your smartphone, Imaging Edge Mobile is required. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version. For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page
(https://www.sony.net/iem/).
1 Display the QR code screen on the camera.
When using a smartphone as a remote controller:

MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → Perform the following operations.
Set [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] to [On].

Execute [ Connection].
When transferring images to your smartphone:

MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Send to Smartphone] → [Select on This Device] → Select
images to transfer.
To select images on your smartphone, choose [Select on Smartphone].
2 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and select [Connect with a new camera].
3 Scan the QR Code displayed on the camera while the [Connect using the camera QR Code] screen is
displayed on the smartphone.
Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the smartphone
screen.
4 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

The smartphone is connected to the camera.
Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this camera’s SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the smartphone. This
enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the camera via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the camera from the camera list
in Imaging Edge Mobile. (Set [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)
419
Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.
If you cannot connect your smartphone to the camera using the NFC function or QR Code, use the SSID and password.
Related Topic
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
420
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Connect your smartphone to the camera using the SSID and password if you cannot connect using NFC or the QR code.
You can connect to the camera with the same operation on any Android smartphone, iPhone, or iPad.
1 Display the QR code screen on the camera.
When using a smartphone as a remote controller:

MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → Perform the following operations.
Set [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] to [On].
Execute [ Connection].

MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Send to Smartphone] → Select images to transfer.
2 Press the (Delete) button on the camera to switch to the SSID and password screen.
3 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera] → [Connect
using the camera SSID/password].
4 Input the password that is displayed on the camera.
The smartphone is connected to the camera.
Note
Related Topic
421
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
422
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can connect the camera to an NFC-enabled smartphone by touching them together.
1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
On an iPhone, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Connect with a new camera] → [Connect with the
camera through One-touch (NFC)] to activate the NFC function.
2 Prepare the camera.
When using your smartphone as a remote controller:

Set MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [On], and set
the camera to the shooting screen.

Set the camera to the playback screen, and display the image you want to transfer.
3 Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.
The smartphone and the camera are connected.
About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones
or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.
Note
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the (N-Mark) of this
camera.
If the camera or smartphone is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.
423
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Related Topic
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
Airplane Mode
424
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
With Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot images while checking the shooting range of the camera on the screen of the
smartphone. Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page. For details
on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, see the Imaging Edge Mobile support page:
https://www.sony.net/iem/
Related Topic
425
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Send to Smartphone
With Imaging Edge Mobile, you can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, slow-motion movies, or quick-motion movies
to a smartphone and view them.
1 Display the image that you want to transfer on the playback screen.
2 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Send to Smartphone] → [Select on This Device] → Select

[This Image].
The QR code is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
You can also display the [Select on This Device] setting screen by pressing the (Send to Smartphone)
button.
3 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera].
4 Scan the camera’s QR code with your smartphone while displaying the [Connect using the camera QR
Code] screen on the smartphone.
Once the QR code is read, [Connect with the camera?] will appear on the smartphone.
5 Select [OK] on the smartphone.
The camera and your smartphone will be connected, and the image will be transferred.
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] in [Select on This
Device].
Menu item details

Select on This Device:
On the camera's monitor, select an image to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All Images in This Group], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the camera’s memory card on the smartphone.
426
Hint
For connection methods other than using the QR code, refer to “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Note
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.
Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.
Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you
want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Related Topic
Airplane Mode
427
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
When transferring a movie to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-bit-rate
proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.
Menu item details

Proxy Only:
Transfers only proxy movies.
Original Only:
Transfers only original movies.
Proxy & Original:
Transfers both proxy and original movies.
Related Topic
Send to Smartphone
Proxy Settings
428
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [Cnct.
during Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.
1 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → desired setting.
Menu Item Details

On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [Cnct. during Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone
Advance Preparation
1. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.

2. MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → [On].
3. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.
4. Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote
Power ON/OFF] screen.
Operations
1. Turn off the camera.

2. Select [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] in Imaging Edge Mobile.
3. Select the camera on the [Remote Power ON/OFF] screen to turn on the camera.
When the power turns on, the power mark turns green.
4. Close the [Remote Power ON/OFF] screen to return to the top page, and select the connected camera from [Camera
List].
The images saved on the memory card of the camera can be viewed and are ready to be transferred.
Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera
Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.
When the camera is turned on, the camera will switch to the shooting screen, and the connection with the smartphone will be
terminated.
Related Topic
429
Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings
430
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.
Preparation in advance
To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.
1. Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.
2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.
After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.
Operating procedure
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera
1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.
2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing].
4. : Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.
5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.
6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.
7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.
431
8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Location Information] → [Location Info Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Menu item details

Location Info Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correction:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date and time setting of the camera using information from a linked
smartphone.
Auto Area Adjustment:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.
When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Imaging Edge Mobile.
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.
When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge
Mobile.
To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].
The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Supported smartphones
432
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/iem/
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
Related Topic
Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
433
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Recommended computer environment
You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/
434
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Connecting the camera to a computer
1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
2 Turn on the camera and the computer.
3 (Setup) → [USB] → Set [USB Connection] to [Mass Storage].
4 Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable.
When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the camera to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use the USB cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.

Use a SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)-compatible computer and the USB cable (supplied) for higher-speed
communications.
Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Related Topic
Sides
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
435
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Perform the following operations on the computer before disconnecting the camera from the computer.
1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.
2 Click the displayed message.

The following operations are available after you have completed the steps above.
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the camera.
Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.
On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.
Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.
436
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Imaging Edge Desktop is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and
adjusting or developing RAW images recorded with the camera.
For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/
437
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Importing images to the computer
You can import images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable, or
by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.
Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection
SD card
CFexpress Type A memory card
DCIM: still images

CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies
Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.
If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become
inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.
The folder tree is different during MTP connection.
438
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off]
beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7sm3/l/pcremote.php
1 MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then
2 Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer.
You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct
Method].
Menu item details

PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
PC Remote Cnct Method:
Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]. ([USB]/[Wi-Fi
Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])
Pairing:
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to
[Wi-Fi Direct].
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC
Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])
PC Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The
original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J PC Save Img:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H PC Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])
How to connect the camera and the computer

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]
Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable.
439
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi
connection information (SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi
connection information displayed on the camera.
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]

Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be
paired in advance.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the wireless
access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Transfer/Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use
Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen
displayed on the camera to finish pairing.
Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.
Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].
When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be
released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot shoot with [PC Remote].
[RAW+J PC Save Img] and [RAW+H PC Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW &
HEIF].
440
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe
If you shoot movies with an audio accessory (sold separately) attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, analog
or digital audio will be recorded via the Multi Interface Shoe.
If you use an audio accessory that supports the digital audio interface, the sound signals will be transmitted in a digital
format. This will allow you a wider range of recordable audio quality, such as the following.
High-quality audio recording with less deterioration

4-channel or 24-bit audio recording
The recordable audio quality differs depending on the audio accessory. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
audio accessory.
Hint
You can change the audio settings for audio accessories that support the digital audio interface using [ Shoe Audio Set.].
Note
Movies recorded with 24-bit audio may not be played back normally on devices or software incompatible with 24-bit audio,
resulting in unexpectedly loud volumes or no sound.
Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
Audio Out Timing
Audio Level Display
Audio Recording
441
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Vertical grip
You can attach a vertical grip (sold separately) to this product and record vertically oriented images. When attaching the
vertical grip, remove the battery cover in advance.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the vertical grip.


Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching
the shaft on the opposite side.
You can attach the removed battery cover to the vertical grip so that you do not lose it.
When a vertical grip is attached to this product, the battery remaining is displayed as .
Note
The LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip are not designed to be attached at the same time. If you attach
them at the same time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the vertical grip will become narrow, making the camera
difficult to hold.
442
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Mount Adaptor
Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
Note
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility on compatible lenses.
You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → [Off].
It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.
Related Topic
443
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.
Full frame shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Automatic AF/Continuous AF/Direct manual focus (DMF)/Manual Focus
When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.
Available focus area:

[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center Fix]/[Spot]/[Expand Spot]/[Tracking]
SteadyShot:
In-body
Note
When a setting other than [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is selected for [Cont. Shooting], the focus is locked during the first shot,
even if [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
444
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.
Full size shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Not available.
Only the manual focusing mode is supported.
SteadyShot:
In-body
Note
The LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip (sold separately) are not designed to be attached at the same
time. If you attach them at the same time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the vertical grip will become narrow, making
the camera difficult to hold.
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
445
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit
You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods. When using the
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit, remove the camera's battery cover.
For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.


Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching
the shaft on the opposite side.
Note
While the plug-in plate of the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit is inserted in the camera, do not slide the battery lock lever of the camera.
The plug-in plate will be ejected from the camera if you do so.
446
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Number of recordable images when shooting still images
Screen mode Approx. 600 images
Viewfinder mode Approx. 510 images
Battery life for actual movie shooting
Screen mode Approx. 95 min.
Viewfinder mode Approx. 80 min.
Battery life for continuous movie shooting
Screen mode Approx. 135 min.
Viewfinder mode Approx. 130 min.
The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony CFexpress Type A memory card (sold separately)
Using a FE 28-70mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)
The numbers of recordable still images are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.
447
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.
Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another
one, or delete images from the current memory card.
When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.
If the (Warning) icon or the (Malfunction) icon is displayed, there is something wrong with the memory card. Replace
the memory card with another one.
The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera.
The numbers shown reflect the following conditions:
Using a Sony memory card

[Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2], and [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [L: 12M]. *1
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
(Unit: images)
SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card

JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
64GB 128GB 80GB 160GB
JPEG Standard 15000 30000 17000 35000
JPEG Fine 11000 22000 12000 25000
JPEG Extra fine 6000 12000 7000 14000
HEIF Standard 21000 43000 25000 48000
HEIF Fine 16000 33000 19000 38000
HEIF Extra fine 12000 24000 13000 28000
RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)*2 2600 5300 3000 6100
RAW & HEIF (Compressed RAW)*2 2800 5700 3300 6700
RAW (Compressed RAW) 3500 7000 4100 8100
RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1600 3200 1800 3800
RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1700 3400 1900 4000
RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 1900 3800 2200 4400
448
*1 When [Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when [RAW] is
selected)
*2 JPEG image quality when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
HEIF image quality when [RAW & HEIF] is selected: [Fine]
Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.
Related Topic
449
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
(h (hour), min (minute))
SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card

File Format Rec Frame Rate Record Setting
64 GB 128 GB 80 GB 160 GB
200M 35 min 70 min 40 min 1 h 25 min
150M 45 min 1 h 35 min 55 min 1 h 50 min
XAVC HS 4K 60p/50p 100M 1 h 10 min 2 h 20 min 1 h 20 min 2 h 50 min
75M 1 h 30 min 3h 1 h 40 min 3 h 40 min
45M 2 h 20 min 4 h 50 min 2 h 40 min 5 h 40 min

XAVC S 4K 60p/50p

XAVC S HD 60p/50p
XAVC S-I 4K 60p/50p 600M/500M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min
XAVC S-I HD 60p/50p 222M/185M 30 min 1 h 5 min 35 min 1 h 15 min
The recording times when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].
The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).
Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.
Notes on continuous movie recording
High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
450
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 30 minutes
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (60p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.
Related Topic
451
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Icons on the shooting screen
Monitor mode
Viewfinder mode
1. Shooting mode/Scene recognition

P P* A S M
Shooting mode
Register number
Scene Recognition icons

2. Camera settings
* * * * * * * * NO CARD
Memory card status

* When shooting in the HEIF format, the HEIF icon is displayed.
100/1h30m
Remaining number of recordable images/Recordable time of movies
Writing data / Number of images left to write
Aspect ratio of still images
452
12M / 11M / 10M / 8.0M / 5.1M / 4.6M / 4.3M / 3.4M / 3.0M / 2.7M / 2.6M / 2.0M / 1.3M / 1.1M / 0.8M
Image size of still images
RAW
RAW recording (compressed/uncompressed)
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD
JPEG Quality / HEIF Quality
4:2:2
HEIF color sampling
XAVC HS 4K XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD XAVC S-I 4K XAVC S-I HD
File format of movies
120p 100p 60p 50p 30p 25p 24p
Frame rate of movies
Record setting of movies
Proxy Recording
4:2:2 10bit/4:2:0 10bit/4:2:0 8bit
Color sampling and bit depth of movies
240fps 200fps 120fps 100fps 60fps 50fps 30fps 25fps 15fps 12fps 8fps 6fps 4fps 3fps 2fps 1fps
Frame rate for slow/quick motion shooting
Flash charge in progress
Setting Effect OFF
Exposure Effect (Exposure Setting Only)
AF Illuminator
Flickering detected
NFC active
SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning
SteadyShot focal length / Camera shake warning
Optical zoom only /Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
PC remote
Bright Monitoring
Silent mode
Remote control
FTP function / FTP transfer status
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi
Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (when using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)
453
No audio recording of movies
Wind Noise Reduct.
Writing copyright information [On]
Writing IPTC information [On]
Touch function in shooting mode (Touch focus/Touch tracking/off)
Focus Cancel
Tracking Cancel
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Connected to smartphone / Not connected to smartphone
Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained
Airplane Mode
Overheating warning
Database file full / Database file error

3. Battery
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply

4. Shooting settings
Drive Mode
Flash Mode/Wireless Flash/Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp.
Focus Mode
Focus Area
File Format
Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
454
D-Range Optimizer
Creative Look
–
Picture Profile
Shutter Type
Prioritize Rec. Media

5. Focus indicator/exposure settings
Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400
ISO AUTO
ISO 400
ISO sensitivity
AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock
Shooting
6. Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Control wheel function
Guide display for My Dial
Bracket indicator
Spot metering area
Histogram
Digital level gauge

STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
Audio format
455
Audio Level Display
REC Control
4K/RAW external output

00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds: frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Icons on the playback screen

Single-image playback
Histogram display
1. Basic information
Playback media
View Mode
IPTC Information
Rating
Protect
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode
NFC active
456
Remaining battery
Display as Group
Proxy movie included
FTP transfer status

2. Camera settings
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen.”
3. Shooting settings
35mm
Lens focal length
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
Copyright information exists for image
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen” for other icons displayed in this area.
4. Image information
Latitude/longitude information
2020-1-1 10:37:00PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number
Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)
457
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
The default setting values for each menu item at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the mode dial. For details, refer to
“Finding functions from MENU.”
To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
The items that can be reset using [Camera Settings Reset] are limited. See the following tables. If you select [Initialize],
all the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
(Shooting)
Resettable using
Default setting
MENU items [Camera Settings
value
Reset]
JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG
File Format JPEG/HEIF
RAW File Type Compressed
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality Fine
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]) L: 12M
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [1:1]) L: 8.0M
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size (when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]
L: 5.1M
recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)
L: 4.3M
L: 3.4M
L: 4.6M
Aspect Ratio 3:2
File Format XAVC S HD
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) 60p/50p
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is set to

45M 4:2:0 10bit
[XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

50M 4:2:0 10bit
[XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])
458
Resettable using
Default setting
value
Reset]

200M 4:2:0 10bit
[XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p])

150M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

60M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S 4K], and[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])

60M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

200M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p])
Movie Settings (Record Setting) ([ File Format] is set to [XAVC

50M 4:2:0 8bit
S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

50M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])

50M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

60M 4:2:0 8bit
[XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p])
600M 4:2:2
10bit/500M 4:2:2
[XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])
10bit
300M 4:2:2
10bit/250M 4:2:2
[XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])
10bit

240M 4:2:2 10bit
[XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])
222M 4:2:2
10bit/185M 4:2:2
[XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])
10bit
111M 4:2:2
10bit/93M 4:2:2
[XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])
10bit

89M 4:2:2 10bit
[XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])
S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) 60p/50p
S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate) 60fps/50fps
S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is set

45M 4:2:0 10bit
to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

50M 4:2:0 10bit
to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

200M 4:2:0 10bit
to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [120p]/[100p])
459
Resettable using
Default setting
value
Reset]

150M 4:2:0 8bit
to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

60M 4:2:0 8bit

60M 4:2:0 8bit
to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

200M 4:2:0 8bit

50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])

50M 4:2:0 8bit

50M 4:2:0 8bit
to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])

60M 4:2:0 8bit
600M 4:2:2
10bit/500M 4:2:2
to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])
10bit
300M 4:2:2
10bit/250M 4:2:2
to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])
10bit

240M 4:2:2 10bit
to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])
222M 4:2:2
10bit/185M 4:2:2
to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p])
10bit
111M 4:2:2
10bit/93M 4:2:2
to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p])
10bit

89M 4:2:2 10bit
to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [24p])
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Recording) Off
Proxy Settings ( Proxy File Format) XAVC S HD
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [ Proxy File

9M 4:2:0 10bit
Format] is set to [XAVC HS HD])
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [ Proxy File

6M 4:2:0 8bit
Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])
Shooting Auto
Long Exposure NR On
High ISO NR Normal
460
Resettable using
Default setting
value
Reset]
HLG Still Image Off
Color Space sRGB
Lens Compensation (Shading Comp.) Auto
Lens Compensation (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto
Lens Compensation (Distortion Comp.) Off
Format ―
Rec. Media Settings (Prioritize Rec. Media) Slot 1
Rec. Media Settings (Recording Mode) Standard
Rec. Media Settings (Auto Switch Media) Off
Recover Image DB*

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize]. ―
Display Media Info. ―
File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series
File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC
File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form
Select REC Folder ―
Create New Folder ―
IPTC Information (Write IPTC Info) Off
IPTC Information (Register IPTC Info) ―
Copyright Info (Write Copyright Info) Off
Copyright Info (Set Photographer) ―
Copyright Info (Set Copyright) ―
Copyright Info (Disp. Copyright Info) ―
Write Serial Number Off
File Settings (File Number) Series
File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―
File Settings (File Name Format) Standard
File Settings (Title Name Settings) ―
Manual
Exposure Mode
Exposure
Manual
Exposure Mode
Exposure
Exposure Ctrl Type P/A/S/M Mode
461
Resettable using
Default setting
value
Reset]
Recall Camera Setting ―
Camera Set. Memory ―
Memory/Recall Media Slot 1
Recall Custom
Reg. Custom Shoot Set
hold 1
Drive Mode Single Shooting
Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off
Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+
Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off
Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec
Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec
Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30
Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid
Electronic
Interval Shoot Func. (Shutter Type in Interval)
Shutter
Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off
Silent Mode Settings (Silent Mode) Off
Silent Mode Settings (when [Target Function Settings] is set to

Standard
[Aperture Drive in AF])
Silent Mode Settings (when [Target Function Settings] is set to

Off
[Auto Pixel Mapping])
Mechanical
Shutter Type
Shutter
e-Front Curtain Shut. On
Release w/o Lens Enable
Release w/o Card Enable
Anti-flicker Shoot. Off
Audio Recording On
Audio Rec Level 26
Audio Out Timing Live
Wind Noise Reduct. Off
Shoe Audio Set.
Audio Level Display On
Time Code Preset 00:00:00.00
462
Resettable using
Default setting
value
Reset]
User Bit Preset 00 00 00 00
Time Code Format DF
Time Code Run Rec Run
Time Code Make Preset
User Bit Time Rec Off
SteadyShot On
SteadyShot Standard
SteadyShot Adjust. Auto
Focal Length (when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to

8mm
[Manual])
Zoom ―
Optical zoom
Zoom Range
only
Zoom Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3
Zoom Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3
Zoom Speed ( Speed Type) Variable
Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3
Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3
Grid Line Display Off
Grid Line Type Rule of 3rds Grid
Live View Display Set. (Live View Display) Setting Effect ON
Exposure Set. &

Live View Display Set. (Exposure Effect)
flash
Live View Display Set. (Frame Rate Low Limit) Off
Emph disp dur REC Off
Marker Display Off
Center Marker Off
Aspect Marker Off
Safety Zone Off
Guideframe Off
(Exposure/Color)
Resettable using [Camera Settings

MENU items Default setting value
Reset]
463
Reset]
Auto Slow Shutter On
ISO ISO AUTO
ISO Range Limit ―
ISO AUTO Min. SS Standard
Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Av Auto/Manual Switch) Manual
Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Tv Auto/Manual Switch) Manual
Exposure Comp. ±0.0
Reset EV Comp. Reset
Exposure step 0.3EV
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Multi) ±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Center) ±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Spot) ±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Entire Screen

±0
Average)
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Highlight) ±0
Metering Mode Multi
Face Priority in Multi Metering On
Spot Metering Point Center
AEL w/ Shutter Auto
Flash Mode Autoflash
Flash Comp. ±0.0
Exp.comp.set Ambient&flash
Wireless Flash Off
Red Eye Reduction Off
External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Firing Set.) ―
External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Cust. Set.) ―
White Balance Auto
Priority Set in AWB Standard
Shutter AWB Lock Off
Shockless WB 1 (Fast)
D-Range Optimizer:
D-Range Optimizer
Auto
Creative Look ST
Picture Profile Off
464
Reset]
Zebra Display Off
Zebra Level 70
(Focus)
MENU items Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]
Focus Mode Automatic AF
Priority Set in AF-S Balanced Emphasis
Priority Set in AF-C Balanced Emphasis
AF Tracking Sensitivity 3(Standard)
AF Illuminator Auto
Aperture Drive in AF Standard
AF w/ Shutter On
Pre-AF Off
AF Transition Speed 5
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity 5(Responsive)
Focus Area Wide
Focus Area Limit Wide
Switch V/H AF Area Off
Focus Area Color White
AF Area Registration Off
Del. Regist. AF Area ―
AF Area Auto Clear Off
AF-C Area Display On
Phase Detect. Area Off
Circ. of Focus Point Does Not Circulate
AF Frame Move Amt Standard
Face/Eye Prior. in AF On
Face/Eye Subject Human
Right/Left Eye Select Auto
Face/Eye Frame Disp. Off
Face Memory ―
Regist. Faces Priority On
Auto Magnifier in MF On
465
MENU items Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]
Focus Magnifier ―
Focus Magnif. Time No Limit
Initial Focus Mag. x1.0
AF in Focus Mag. On
Initial Focus Mag. x1.0
Peaking Display Off
Peaking Level Mid
Peaking Color White
(Playback)
To reset the items for [Playback] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values
even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].
Select Playback Media ―
View Mode Date View
Enlarge Image ―
Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position
Protect ―
Rating ―
Rating Set(Custom Key) ―
Delete ―
Delete confirm. "Cancel" first
Rotate ―
Copy ―
Photo Capture ―
JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG
Cont. Play for Interval —
Play Speed for Interval 5
Slide Show (Repeat) Off
Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec
Image Index 9 Images
Display as Group Off
Display Rotation Auto
466
Focus Frame Display Off
Select Image Jump Dial Front dial
Image Jump Method One by one
(Network)
To reset the items for [Network] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Reset Network Set.]. These items are not reset
to the default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].
Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Ctrl w/ Smartphone) Off
Ctrl w/ Smartphone ( Connection) ―
Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Always Connected) Off
Send to Smartphone ―
Sending Target Proxy Only
Cnct. during Power OFF Off
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Function) Off
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Connect Method) Wi-Fi
FTP Transfer Func. (USB-LAN/Tethering Connect) ―
FTP Transfer Func. (USB-LAN/Tethering Discnct.) ―
FTP Transfer Func. ( Server Setting) Server 1
FTP Transfer Func. (Save/Load FTP Settings) ―
FTP Transfer Func. (when [FTP Transfer] is set to [Target Group]) This Date
FTP Transfer Func. (when [FTP Transfer] is set to [Still Images/Movies]) All
FTP Transfer Func. (when [FTP Transfer] is set to [Target Img (Protect)]) All
FTP Transfer Func. (when [FTP Transfer] is set to [Transfer Status]) All
FTP Transfer Func. (Display FTP Result) ―
FTP Transfer Func. ( Auto FTP Transfer) Off
FTP Transfer Func. (RAW+J/H Transfer Target) JPEG & HEIF
FTP Transfer Func. ( Transfer Target) Proxy Only
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Power Save) Off
PC Remote Function (PC Remote) Off
PC Remote Function (PC Remote Cnct Method) USB
PC Remote Function (Pairing) ―
PC Remote Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―
PC Remote Function (Still Img. Save Dest.) PC Only
467
PC Remote Function (PC Save Image Size) Original
PC Remote Function (RAW+J PC Save Img) RAW & JPEG
PC Remote Function (RAW+H PC Save Image) RAW & HEIF
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off
Location Info Link Off
Auto Time Correction

On
(when [Location Info Link] is set to [On])
Auto Area Adjustment

On
(when [Location Info Link] is set to [On])
WPS Push ―
Access Point Set. ―
Wi-Fi Frequency Band 2.4GHz
Display Wi-Fi Info. ―
SSID/PW Reset ―
Bluetooth Function Off
Pairing ―
Disp Device Address ―
IP Address Setting Auto
Display Wired LAN Info. ―
Airplane Mode Off
Edit Device Name ―
Import Root Certificate ―
Security(IPsec) (IPsec) Off
Security(IPsec) (Dest. IP Address) ―
Security(IPsec) (Shared Key) ―
Reset Network Set. ―
(Setup)
To reset the items for [Setup] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values even
if you select [Camera Settings Reset].
Language ―
Area/Date/Time Setting (Area Setting) ―
Area/Date/Time Setting (Daylight Savings) Off
Area/Date/Time Setting (Date/Time) ―
468
Area/Date/Time Setting (Date Format) ―
Setting Reset ―
Save/Load Settings ―
Custom Key Setting (Control Wheel) Not set
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1) White Balance
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 2) Autofocus Area
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 3) Focus Mode
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 4) Touch Operation Select
Custom Key Setting (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Focus Standard
Custom Key Setting (Center Button) Not set
Custom Key Setting (Left Button) Drive Mode
Custom Key Setting (Right Button) ISO
Custom Key Setting (Down Button) Not set
Custom Key Setting (AEL Button) AEL hold
Custom Key Setting (AF-ON Button) AF On
Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting
Custom Key Setting (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold
Custom Key Setting (Control Wheel) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Center Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Left Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Right Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Down Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (AEL Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (AF-ON Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting
Custom Key Setting (Focus Hold Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( / )
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 2) Follow Custom ( / )
469
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 3) Protect
Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button) Follow Custom ( / )
Custom Key Setting (Fn/ Button) Send to Smartphone
Fn Menu Settings ―
Different Set for Still/Mv ―
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor) Display All Info.
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Finder) Level
REC w/ Shutter Off
Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T)
My Dial Settings ―
Dial Setup Av Tv
Av/Tv Rotate Normal
Dial Ev Comp Off
Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus
Lock Operation Parts Off
Touch Operation On
Touch Sensitivity Standard
Touch Panel/Pad Touch Panel Only
Touch Pad Settings (Operation in Vertical Orientation ) On
Touch Pad Settings (Touch Position Mode) Absolute Position
Touch Pad Settings (Operation Area) Right 1/2
Touch Func. in Shooting Touch Tracking
Select Finder/Monitor Auto
Monitor Brightness ±0
Viewfinder Bright. Auto
Finder Color Temp. ±0
Viewfinder Magnifi. Standard
Display Quality Standard
Finder Frame Rate Standard
TC/UB Disp. Setting Counter
Gamma Display Assist Off
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ. Auto
Remain Shoot Display Not Displayed
470
Auto Review Off
Power Save Start Time 1 Min
Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard
Volume Settings 7
4ch Audio Monitoring CH1/CH2
Audio signals On
USB Connection Auto
USB LUN Setting Multi
USB Power Supply On
HDMI Resolution Auto
HDMI Output Settings (Rec. Media dur HDMI Output) On
HDMI Output Settings (Output Resolution) Auto
HDMI Output Settings (4K Output Set.(HDMI Only)) 60p 10bit/50p 10bit
HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output) Off
HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output Setting) 60p/50p
HDMI Output Settings (Color Gamut for RAW Output)
HDMI Output Settings (Time Code Output) Off
HDMI Output Settings (REC Control) Off
HDMI Output Settings (4ch Audio Output) CH1/CH2
HDMI Info. Display On
CTRL FOR HDMI On
Video Light Mode Power Link
IR Remote Ctrl Off
Sensor Cleaning ―
Auto Pixel Mapping On
Pixel Mapping ―
Version ―
(My Menu)
To reset the items for [My Menu] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Delete All]. These items are not reset to the
default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].
Add Item ―
Sort Item ―
471
Delete Item ―
Delete Page ―
Delete All ―
Display From My Menu Off
472
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Specifications
Camera
[System]
Camera Type
Lens
Sony E-mount lens
[Image sensor]
Image format
35 mm full frame (35.6 mm × 23.8 mm), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera

Approx. 12 100 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera

Approx. 12 900 000 pixels
[SteadyShot]
System
In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system
[Anti-Dust]
System
Anti-dust function based on antistatic coating and ultrasonic vibration
[Auto focus system]

Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–6 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
AF illuminator
Approx. 0.3 m to 3.0 m (When using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS)
[Electronic Viewfinder]
Type
1.6 cm (0.64 type) Electronic Viewfinder
Total number of dots
9 437 184 dots
Frame coverage
100%
Magnification
Approx. 0.90× with 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m–1
473
Eye Point
Approx. 25 mm from the eyepiece and approx. 21 mm from the eyepiece frame at –1 m－1
Diopter Adjustment
－4.0 m－1 to ＋3.0 m－1
[Monitor]
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
1 440 000 dots
[Exposure control]
Metering method
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 80 to ISO 102 400 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 40, maximum ISO 409 600)
Movies: equivalent to ISO 80 through ISO 102 400 (Extended ISO: maximum equivalent to ISO 409 600)
Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)
When using exposure compensation dial: ±3.0 EV (1/3 EV step)
[Shutter]
Type
Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range
Still images: 1/8 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB
Movies: 1/8 000 second to 1/4 second (1/3 EV step)
60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
Flash sync speed

1/250 second (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)
[Continuous shooting]
Continuous shooting speed
(Continuous Shooting: Hi+) : Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.
[Recording format]
File format
JPEG (compliant with DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, and MPF Baseline), HEIF (MPEG-A MIAF compliant), RAW (Sony
ARW 4.0 format compliant)
Movie (XAVC HS format)
XAVC Ver2.0: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48kHz 24bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48kHz 24bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
Movie (XAVC S format)
474
XAVC Ver2.0: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48kHz 24bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48kHz 24bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
*1 When using accessories that can support 4ch output and 24 bits with the multi-interface shoe
*2 Proxy movies
[Recording media]
CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards
[Slot]
SLOT 1/SLOT 2
Slot for CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)
Supports operations between two memory cards.
[Input/output terminals]
USB Type-C terminal
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)
Compatible with USB Power Delivery
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)
* Supports Micro USB compatible devices.
HDMI
HDMI type A jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
[Power, general]
Rated input
7.2 V
Power consumption
Using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS
When using the viewfinder: Approx. 4.3 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 7.6 W (while shooting movies)
When using the monitor: Approx. 3.3 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 7.3 W (while shooting movies)
Operating temperature
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20 to 55°C (–4 to 131°F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
128.9 × 96.9 × 80.8 mm
128.9 × 96.9 × 69.7 mm (from grip to monitor)
5 1/8 × 3 7/8 × 3 1/4 in.
5 1/8 × 3 7/8 × 2 3/4 in. (from grip to monitor)
Mass (Approx.)
699 g (1 lb 8.7 oz) (including battery pack, SDXC memory card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
475
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible
[Wireless LAN]
WW271448 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
WW389565 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
[NFC]
Tag type
NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant
[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 5.0
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Battery charger BC-QZ1

Rated input
100 – 240 V , 50/60 Hz, 0.38 A
Rated output
8.4 V , 1.6 A
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100
Rated voltage
7.2 V
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
476
477
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Trademarks
XAVC S and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

XAVC HS and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The CFexpress Type A logo is a trademark licensed by the CompactFlash Association.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.
478
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
License
Notes on the License
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder. However, please
note that Android products may be unable to access the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder on this product. In this case, a
message such as “Unsupported Sony USB drive” may be displayed by the Android product. It is therefore recommended
that you use a device other than an Android product to read the licenses.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are included in the product.
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source code for these software
programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web.
Use the following URL to download it.
https://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.
479
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
1 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.
2 Initialize the settings.
3 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/
Related Topic
Setting Reset
480
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Warning messages
Set Area/Date/Time.
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable
backup battery.
Power insufficient.
The image copying or the image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is too
low. Recharge the battery pack or supply power by connecting the camera with a computer, etc.
Unable to use memory card. Format?
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.
Memory Card Error
An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.
Memory card locked.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.
No memory card has been inserted into the memory card slot selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.
Processing...
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.
Unable to display.
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.
481
Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".
The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set [
Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.
(Overheating warning)
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.
(Database file error)
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.
(Database file error)
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.
Image DataBase File error
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover
Image DB].
System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.
Image Database File error. Recover?
You cannot record and play back a movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the Image
Database File following the on-screen instructions.
Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.
Cannot create more folders.
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.
Related Topic
Format
Release w/o Card
482
483
Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 α7SIII
Recommended pages
File Format (movie)

You can select the movie file format.

Refer to this topic for the shooting duration of movies recordable on the memory card.
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Switches the file format (JPEG/HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
FTP Help Guide

Refer to the “FTP Help Guide” when you want to transfer images to an FTP server.

This website provides basic information about the camera and information regarding compatible lenses and
accessories. (Another window will open.)
484

Uploaded by

Uploaded by

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

File Format (movie)

You can select the movie file format.

Recordable movie times

Switches the file format (JPEG/HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.

FTP Help Guide

ILCE-7SM3 support information

How to use the “Help Guide”

Checking the camera and the supplied items

Memory cards that can be used

Notes on using your camera

Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

Notes on memory card

Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)

Touch operations on the monitor

Using the control wheel

Using the multi-selector

Using the mode dial

Using the MENU button

Using the C (custom) buttons

Using the Fn (Function) button

Using the DISP (Display Setting) button

Using the Delete button

Using the AEL button

Using the AF-ON button

Using the front dial and rear dial

Using the keyboard

Preparing the camera/Basic shooting operations

Charging the battery pack

Charging the battery pack using a charger

Inserting/removing the battery pack

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera

Using the battery charger abroad

Inserting/removing a memory card

Setting language, date and time

Basic shooting operations

Confirmation before shooting

Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)

Finding functions from MENU

Using the shooting functions

Contents of this chapter

Selecting a shooting mode

Exposure Ctrl Type

Auto/Manual Swt. Set.

Movie: Exposure Mode

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

Auto Slow Shutter

Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)

Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

Focusing on human eyes

Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)

Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)

Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)

Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)

Using the AF functions

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)

AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)

Focus Area Color (still image/movie)

AF Area Auto Clear

AF-C Area Display

Phase Detect. Area

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Adjusting the exposure/metering modes

Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

Reset EV Comp. (still image/movie)

Exposure step (still image/movie)

Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)